Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

over many things

  • 1 πολύς

    πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).
    pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).
    ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.
    γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).
    comparative πλείων, πλεῖον
    α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.
    β. subst.
    א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.
    ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).
    superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).
    pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)
    א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).
    ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.
    ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).
    ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.
    comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως
    α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.
    β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.
    superl. πλεῖστος, ον
    α. adj.
    א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).
    ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.
    β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).
    pert. to being high on a scale of extent
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.
    β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).
    γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.
    superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)
    α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.
    β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς

  • 2 ὄνομα

    ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).
    proper name of an entity, name
    gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)
    used w. verbs
    α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.
    β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to
    used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.
    used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.3 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III4 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus
    α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).
    β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.
    γ. used w. prepositions
    א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.
    ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.
    ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.
    ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.
    ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.
    ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).
    ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.
    ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.
    δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.
    a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.
    the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).
    recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).
    name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα

  • 3 περιβάλλω

    περιβάλλω, [tense] fut. - βᾰλῶ: [tense] aor. περιέβᾰλον (v. infr.):—
    A throw round, about, or over, put on or over, c. acc. rei,

    φίλας περὶ χεῖρε βαλόντε Od. 11.211

    ;

    περὶ πτερὰ πυκνὰ βαλόντες Il.11.454

    ;

    περὶ δ' ἄντυγα βάλλε φαεινήν 18.479

    ;

    π. χέρας Ar.Th. 914

    , E.Or. 1044: freq. c. dat.,

    χέρας π. τινί Id.Ph. 1459

    , etc.; περὶ δ' ὠλένας δέρᾳ.. βάλοιμι ib. 165 (lyr.); π. τινὶ δεσμά, βρόχους, A.Pr.52, E.Ba. 619;

    Τροίᾳ ζευκτήριον A.Ag. 529

    ;

    κρατὶ π. σκότον E.HF 1159

    ; π. τινὰ χαλκεύματι put him round the sword, i. e. stab him, A.Ch. 576; also περὶ τὰ στέρνα θώρηκας π. Hdt. 1.215, cf. 5.85;

    αἱμασιὴν π. κατὰ τὸν κύκλον Id.7.60

    ; περὶ ἕρμα π. ναῦν wreck it on.., Th.7.25:—[voice] Med., throw round or over oneself, put on, c. acc. rei, περιβαλλόμενοι τεύχεα putting on their arms, Od.22.148;

    περὶ δὲ ζώνην βάλετ' ἰξυῖ 5.231

    ;

    ξίφος περὶ στιβαροῖς βάλετ' ὤμοις 14.528

    ; εἷμα, φᾶρος περιβάλλεσθαι, Hdt. 1.152, 9.109;

    φάρεα καὶ πλοκάμους E.IT 1150

    (lyr.);

    κόσμον σώμασιν Id.HF 334

    ;

    κύκλον ὅσον περιβάλλεται αἰθήρ Hermesian.7.87

    ; freq. of defences,

    τεῖχος καὶ σωτηρίην περιβαλέσθαι τοῖς τε χρήμασι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν Democr.280

    ; also

    ὅταν περιβάλωνται χειρις μοὺς παραλλάττοντας Phld.Rh.1.8

    S.;

    π. ἕρκος ἔρυμα τῶν νεῶν Hdt.9.96

    ;

    τείχεα Id.1.141

    , cf. 6.46, Th.1.8 ;

    ταῖς πόλεσιν ἐρύματα περιβάλλονται X.Mem.2.1.14

    ;

    Πελοποννήσῳ π. ἓν τεῖχος Arist.Pol. 1276a27

    ; λιμένι τεῖχος, χάρακα τῇ παρεμβολῇ, Plb.4.65.11, 5.20.5 ; also περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον τεῖχος π. Lys.2.45: c. dupl. acc., τεῖχος περιβαλέσθαι πόλιν build a wall round it, Hdt.1.163 : in [tense] pf. [voice] Pass., have a thing put round one, Pl.Smp. 216d ; τὸ τεῖχος περιβεβλημένος having his wall around him, encompassed by it, Id.Tht. 174e, cf. Arist.Pol. 1331a8.
    2 metaph., put round or upon a person, i. e. invest him with it, π. τινὶ ἀγαθόν (i. e. βασιληΐην), τυραννίδα, Hdt.1.129, E. Ion 829 ;

    π. σωτηρίαν [τισί] Id.HF 304

    ;

    ὕδασι δουλείαν Id.Ph. 189

    (lyr.);

    οἶκτον Id.IA 934

    ; τινὶ π. ἀνανδρίαν, i.e. make him faint-hearted, Id.Or. 1031; π. τὴν αἰτίαν τῷ ἰατρῷ impute blame to.., Pall.in Hp.12.283 C.:—[voice] Pass., c. acc., to be involved in,

    μεγίστην ζημίαν τὸ ταμεῖον περιβληθήσεται SIG888.87

    (Scaptopara, iii A. D.).
    II reversely c. dat. rei, surround, encompass with.., περιβαλεῖν πλῆθος τῶν ἰχθύων (sc. τῷ ἀμφιβλήστρῳ) Hdt.1.141;

    βρόχῳ π. τὸν αὐχένα Id.4.60

    (tm.); [Βόσπορον] πέδαις π. A.Pers. 748;

    π. τινὰ ὑφάσματι E.Or.25

    ;

    δοραῖσι σῶμα Id.Cyc. 330

    ; π. τινὰ χερσί embrace, Id.Or. 372 :—[voice] Med., surround or enclose for one's advantage or defence,

    τὴν νῆσον π. τείχει Pl.Criti. 116a

    ;

    χωρίον X.Cyr.6.3.30

    ; π. θύννους net them, Arist.HA 537a20, cf. 533b25.
    2 metaph., π. τινὰ κακῷ, συμφοραῖς, involve one in evil or calamity, E.Or. 906, Antipho 3.2.12 ;

    ἀνηκέστοις πόλιν συμφοραῖς And.1.142

    , cf. Lys.4.20;

    ὀνείδει D.22.35

    ; π. τινὰ φυγῇ, i.e. banish him, Plu.2.775c;

    τινὰ κλοπῆς καταδίκῃ Id.Arist.4

    :— [voice] Pass., [ συμφοραῖς] Phld.Piet. 35b.
    III c. acc. only, encompass, surround, περιβάλλει με σκότος, νέφος, E.Ph. 1453, HF 1140 ; π. ἀλλήλους embrace each other, X.An.4.7.25, cf. Men.Pk.36, 111; also, clothe, τινα Ev.Matt.25.36; τὸ περιβεβλημένον the space enclosed, enclosure, Hdt.2.91; cf.

    περίβολος 11.2

    :—[voice] Med., ἤλαυνον περιβαλόμενοι [τὰ ὑποζύγια] surrounding them, Id.9.39, cf. X.Cyr.1.4.17.
    2 fetch a compass round, double,

    ἵπποι περὶ τέρμα βαλοῦσαι Il.23.462

    ; esp. of ships, round a cape,

    π. τὸν Ἄθων Hdt.6.44

    ;

    Σούνιον Th.8.95

    : abs., of a hare, double, X.Cyn.5.29, 6.18.
    3 amplify, expand,

    λόγον Hermog.Id.1.4

    , cf. 11: abs., ib.3,al.
    IV [voice] Med., bring into one's power, compass,

    ἰδίῃ π. ἑωυτῷ κέρδεα Hdt.3.71

    ;

    πολλὰ [χρήματα] Id.8.8

    , cf. 7.190; σωφροσύνης δόξαν π. X.Mem.4.2.6;

    τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν πραγμάτων περιβαλλόμενος D.18.231

    ;

    πλῆθος λείας Plb.1.29.7

    , cf. 3.69.7 : [tense] pf. [voice] Pass., to have come into possession of..,

    πόλιν Hdt.6.24

    ;

    δυναστείας Isoc.4.184

    , cf. 2.25.
    2 appropriate mentally, comprehend,

    περιβάλλεσθαι τῇ διανοίᾳ τὰς πράξεις Id.5.118

    ; πολλὰ περιβεβλῆσθαι πράγματα to have aimed at learning many things, Men.683; logically, ξύμπαντα τὰ οἰκεῖα.. γένους τινὸς οὐσίᾳ π. embrace, Pl.Plt. 285b.
    V throw beyond, beat in throwing: hence generally, excel, surpass,

    μνηστῆρας δώροισι Od.15.17

    ; π. ἀρετῇ to be superior in.., Il.23.276.
    VI π. τὸ λουτρόν take a bath, Cass.Pr.5 ; π. πρὸς λουτρόν ibid.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > περιβάλλω

  • 4 ὀπάζω

    ὀπάζω, [tense] impf.
    A

    ὤπαζον Il.8.341

    ; [dialect] Ep.

    ὄπ- 16.730

    : [dialect] Ep. [tense] fut.

    ὀπάσσω Od.8.430

    ,21.214 : [tense] aor.

    ὤπασα Il.13.416

    , Hes.Th. 974, Pi.N.1.16, and Trag. (v. infr.); [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also ὄπασσα, Od.10.204, Pi.I.7(6).38 :—[voice] Med., [tense] aor. ὠπασάμην, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὀπάσσατο Il.19.238

    ; [ per.] 2sg. subj.

    ὀπάσσεαι 10.238

    :—[voice] Pass., only in [tense] pres. (v. fin.):—poet. Verb, perh. causal of ἕπομαι, make to follow, send with one, give as a companion or follower,

    ἐπεί ῥά οἱ ὤπασα πομπόν Il.13.416

    ;

    σοὶ γάρ με πατὴρ ἅμα πομπὸν ὄπασσεν 24.461

    , cf. Od.9.90 ;

    ἅμ' ἡγεμόν' ἐσθλὸν ὄπασσον 15.310

    ;

    ἀρχὸν δὲ μετ' ἀμφοτέροισιν ὄπασσα 10.204

    ; πολὺν δέ μοι ὤπασε λαόν, i. e. made me leader over many, Il.9.483, cf. Pi.N.1.16 ;

    ὦ Ζεῦ, γυναικῶν οἷον ὤπασας γένος A.Th. 256

    :—[voice] Med., bid another follow one, take with one, take as a companion,

    σὺ δὲ χείρον' ὀπάσσεαι Il.10.238

    ;

    Νέστορος υἷας ὀπάσσατο 19.238

    ;

    κήρυκά τ' ὀπασσάμενος καὶ ἑταῖρον Od.10.59

    :—Nic. uses the [voice] Med. in act. sense,

    σκολόπενδρα.. ὀπάζεται ἀνδράσι κῆρα Th. 813

    : Hes. never has it in this sense.
    II also of things, make or give to be with a person, then simply, give, grant, τούτῳ.. Ζεὺς κῦδος ὀπάζει gives him glory to be with him, Il.8.141, cf. 17.566 ; κτήματα, ἀρετήν, κάλλος, ἀοιδήν, φῆμιν, ὀϊζύν, etc., freq. in Hom., Od.21.214, 13.45, Il.6.156, Od.8.498, 24.201, 23.210, al. ; πολλὰ γὰρ ὤπασε παιδί gave her as a portion, Il.22.51 ; τέλος ἐσθλὸν ὀ. grant a happy end, Hes.Op. 474 ; ὄλβον, ἄγρην, Id.Th. 420, 442 ;

    εὐδίαν ἐκ χειμῶνος ὀ. Pi.I.7(6).38

    , al.;

    Ὕβρις.. πλοῦτον.. ἀλλότριον ὤπασεν B.14.60

    ;

    πῦρ ἐγώ σφιν ὤπασα A.Pr. 254

    , cf. 8, 30, Pers. 762, Eu. 530 (lyr.) ; a few times in E., e. g. Med. 517, twice in Ar., Eq. 200 (mock heroic), Th. 973 (lyr.): with pleon. inf., Πατρόκλῳ.. κόμην ὀπάσαιμι φέρεσθαι, like δίδωμι ἔχειν, Il.23.151, cf. Pi.O.9.66 :—[voice] Med.,

    καλάμινθον ὀπάζεο

    take to yourself..,

    Nic.Th.60

    , cf. 520.
    2 give besides something else, add,

    ἔργῳ δ' ἔργον ὄπαζε h.Merc. 120

    ;

    χάριν ἅμ' ὄπασσον ἀοιδῇ h.Hom.24.5

    ;

    μελέταν ἔργοις ὀ.

    devote,

    Pi.I.6(5).67

    ; ἔργον ὤπασεν πρὸς ἀσπίδι put the work of art on the shield, A.Th. 492.
    III press hard, chase,

    Ἕκτωρ ὤπαζε κάρη κομόωντας Ἀχαιούς Il.8.341

    ; χαλεπὸν δέ σε γῆρας ὀπάζει ib. 103 ; πολὺν καθ' ὅμιλον ὀπάζων (sc. αὐτήν) 5.334, cf. 17.462 ; φόνια δ' ὤπασας λέχε' ἀπὸ γᾶς didst chase them away, E.El. 1192 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., ποταμὸς.. ὀπαζόμενος Διὸς ὄμβρῳ a torrent forced on by rain, Il.11.493.
    IV ὀπασθείς· ἐκ τῶν ὀπίσω δεθείς, καὶ ἐξαγκωνισθείς, Hsch. (but cf. ὀσταθείς Id.). (The relation to ἕπομαι, ὀπαδός, ὀπάων is uncertain.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὀπάζω

  • 5 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8. Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

  • 6 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    marker of hostile opposition, against
    w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 7 ἔχω

    ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.
    to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)
    to possess someth. that is under one’s control
    α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.
    β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.
    to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts
    α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.
    β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.
    to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.
    to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.
    to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.
    to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as
    of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).
    more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.
    to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip
    of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.
    of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.
    of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.
    of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.
    to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).
    be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.
    to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.
    to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)
    of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)
    α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.
    β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).
    γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.
    δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).
    ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.
    of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.
    as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.
    special combinations
    w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.
    τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).
    to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).
    pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.
    to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.
    of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.
    of proximity
    α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.
    β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω

  • 8 τίθημι

    τίθημι [pron. full] [τῐ], [ per.] 2sg.
    A

    τιθεῖς Pi.P.8.11

    , S.Ph. 992 cod. B ( τιθείς LA rec.), E.Cyc. 545 codd. Lp (- θείς P,

    τίθης

    l), Alc.

    890

    codd. pler., corrupted to

    τιθείς Pl.R. 376e

    Stob., Arr.Epict.3.22.76, Pl.Euthd. 301e ([etym.] ἐπι-), Lib. Or.46.28 ([etym.] προς-) ; ἐν-τιθεῖς (v.l. -εὶς) Ar.Eq. 717;

    περι-τιθεῖς BGU 1141.19

    (i B.C.); but τίθης is found in Pl.R.l.c. codd. AD, Ar. l.c. cod. A, Lib.Or.27.11 ([etym.] προς-), etc., and is taught by Choerob. in Theod. 2.328 H.; [dialect] Ep.

    τίθησθα Od.9.404

    , 24.476, and so in [dialect] Aeol., Alc.Supp.4.27 (

    τίθεισθα Hsch.

    ); [ per.] 3sg.

    τίθησι Il.4.83

    , al., and [dialect] Att.; [dialect] Dor.

    τίθητι SIG 331.13

    (Megara, iv B.C.), Theoc.3.48; [ per.] 3pl.

    τιθέασι Th.5.96

    , Alex.128; [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion.

    τιθεῖσι Il.16.262

    , Hes.Th. 597, Hdt.2.91 (also A.Ag. 466 (lyr.)); [dialect] Aeol. τίθεισι ([etym.] προ-) Schwyzer 631 A 2 (ii B.C.); [dialect] Dor.

    τίθεντι IG12(3).103.10

    ([place name] Nisvrus); [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3sg.

    τιθεῖ Il.13.732

    , Mimn.1.6, Hdt. 1.113, also Arc., SIG559.16 (Megalop., iii B.C. ) (

    τιθῶ Luc.Ocyp.43

    ,81, διατιθῶ cited by A.D.Synt.290.6): [tense] impf.

    ἐτίθην Pl.Grg. 500b

    ;

    ἐτίθεις Id.R. 528d

    , Ar.Nu.59 ([etym.] ἐν-), etc.;

    ἐτίθει Il.18.541

    , al., Ar.Ach. 532, Nu. 63 ([etym.] προς-), etc., [dialect] Ep.

    τίθει Il.1.441

    , al.; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl.

    τίθεσαν Od.22.456

    ;

    τίθεν Pi.P.3.65

    ;

    πρό-τιθεν Od.1.112

    (Aristarch.); late

    ἐτίθουν Act.Ap.4.35

    ; [dialect] Ion. [tense] impf. τίθεσκον Hes Fr.112; ἐτίθεα ([etym.] ὑπερ-) Hdt.3.155: imper.

    τίθει Il.1.509

    , etc.; inf. τιθέναι, not in Hom. or Hes.; [dialect] Ep.

    τιθήμεναι Il.23.83

    ;

    τιθέμεν Hes.Op. 744

    , Pi.P.1.40;

    τιθεῖν Thgn.286

    , IG12(9).189.5 ([place name] Eretria); written

    τιθῖν Byzantion 8.50

    (Phrygia, iv A.D.); part. τιθείς, but [dialect] Ion. pl. τιθεῦντες v.l. in Hdt.2.91: [tense] fut. θήσω, [dialect] Ep. inf.

    θησέμεναι Il.12.35

    ,

    θησέμεν Pi.P.10.58

    : [tense] aor.1 ἔθηκα, only used in indic., and mostly in sg., for though [ per.] 3pl. is common, the 1 and [ per.] 2pl. are rare, X.Mem.4.2.15, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hyp.Eux.9; even ἔθηκαν is very rare in early Attic,

    ἀνέθηκαν IG2.1620d

    , 22.2971 (both iv B.C.), but is found in Plb.8.4.4, etc.; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl.

    θῆκαν Il.24.795

    , etc.: [tense] aor. 2 ἔθην, not used in indic. sg., whereas pl. is very common, ἔθεμεν, ἔθετε, ἔθεσαν, [dialect] Ep.

    θέσαν 12.29

    , etc.; imper.

    θές Ar.Lys. 185

    , etc.; [dialect] Lacon. [ per.] 3sg. σέτω ib. 1081; subj. θῶ, [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Ion.

    θέω Sapph.12

    , ([etym.] προς-) Hdt.1.108, [dialect] Ep.

    θείω Il.16.83

    , al. (for Θή-ω); [dialect] Ep. 2 and [ per.] 3sg. θήῃς, θήῃ, 6.432, 16.96, Od.10.301, 341 (sts. with the opt. forms θείης, θείη as v.l.); [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 1pl. θέωμεν (disyll.) 24.485, θείομεν (for Θήο-μεν, short-vowel subjunctive) Il.23.244, Od.13.364; opt. θείην, [ per.] 1pl.

    θεῖμεν 12.347

    , Pl.Prt. 343e ( θείημεν codd. BT),

    προς-θεῖμεν Id.R. 370d

    , and

    κατα-θεῖτε D.14.27

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    θεῖεν S.OC 865

    ; inf. θεῖναι, [dialect] Ep.

    θέμεναι Il.2.285

    ,

    θέμεν Od.21.3

    , Hes.Op.61,67; [dialect] Dor.

    θέμειν IG 12(1).677.13

    (Rhodes, iv B.C.); part.

    θείς Il.23.254

    , etc.: [tense] pf. τέθηκα [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG22.2490.7 (iv B.C.), ([etym.] ἀνα-) ib.839.38, 1299.44, 1534.76, also at Delos, ib.11(2).161 A6 (iii B.C.), etc., and in Papyri, POxy. 1087.42 (i B.C.);

    τέθεικα PCair.Zen. 324

    (iii B.C.), ([etym.] ὑπο-) PPetr.3p.53 (iii B.C.), ([etym.] ἐκ-) UPZ62.4 (ii B.C.), ([etym.] ἀνα-) IG22.1011.71,80 (ii B.C.), ([etym.] προς-) Str.1.2.23; hence some editors restore τέθηκα for τέθεικα in Attic authors, as X.Mem.4.4.19, D.20.55, 22.16, 27.36, Alex.15.13; Phocian [ per.] 3pl.

    ἀνα-τεθέκαντι BCH59.202

    ([place name] Daulis):—[voice] Med. τίθεμαι, [ per.] 2sg.

    τίθεσαι Pl.Tht. 202c

    ; τίθη or τίθῃ dub. in PTeb.768.9 (ii B.C.); as [voice] Pass., AP11.300 (Pall.); imper.

    τίθεσο Ar. Pax 1039

    , Pl. Sph. 237b,

    τίθου A.Eu. 226

    , [dialect] Dor. τίθευσο cj. in AP9.564 (Nic., τιθεύσω cod., τίθεσσο Plan., cf. ἀφίκευσο); [dialect] Ep. part.

    τιθήμενος Il.10.34

    : [tense] fut.

    θήσομαι 24.402

    , etc.: [tense] aor. 1 ἒθηκάμην, only in indic. and part., and never in [dialect] Att.; [ per.] 2sg.

    ἐθήκαο Theoc.29.18

    ; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    θήκατο Il.10.31

    , Hes.Sc. 128; part.

    θηκάμενος Thgn.1150

    , Pi.P.4.29: [tense] aor. 2

    ἐθέμην Il.2.750

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. [ per.] 3sg.

    θέτο 10.149

    , Pi.N.10.89; imper.

    θέο Od. 10.333

    ,

    θοῦ S.OC 466

    ; subj.

    θῶμαι E.HF 486

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 2sg.

    θῆαι Od. 19.403

    ; opt.

    θείμην S.Ant. 188

    , etc.; [ per.] 3sg.

    θεῖτο Od.17.225

    , A.Pr. 527 (lyr.), Pl.Tht. 195c, etc. (πρός-θοιτο, -θοισθε, ἔν-θοιτο are found in D. 11.6, 21.188, 34.17, but

    προς-θεῖτο Id.6.12

    codd.; ἐπιθοίμεθα, -θοιντο, Th.6.34,11; cf.

    τιθοῖτο X.Mem.3.8.10

    ): [tense] pf. (v. infr.):—[voice] Pass.

    τίθεμαι SIG57.25

    (Milet., v B.C.), Pl.Lg. 705e, 744a: [tense] fut.

    τεθήσομαι E.El. 1268

    , Pl.Lg. 730b, D.24.17: [tense] aor.

    ἐτέθην E.HF 1245

    , Lys.31.28, etc. (

    ἐθέθην IG14.862

    (Cumae, vi B.C.)): [tense] pf. τέθειμαι, rare in early Gr., LXX 1 Ki.9.24, Ev.Marc.15.47, ([etym.] προς-) Arist.Mech. 853a35; inf.

    τεθεῖσθαι Ar.Fr. 327

    codd. (but f.l.); part.

    τεθειμένος Demad.12

    , ([etym.] προ-) X.Hier.9.11, ([etym.] δια-) Men.591; also used in med. sense, D.21.49, SIG705.17 (Delph., ii B.C.), BGU1735.11 (i B.C.), Luc.Somn.9, ([etym.] ἐν-) D.34.16, ([etym.] προ-) Supp.Epigr.7.62.6 (Seleucia Pieria, ii B.C.), ([etym.] συν-) OGI229.62 (Smyrna, iii B.C.); ὑπεκ-τεθημένος (sic) BCH54.269 (Rhamnus, iii B.C.); ἀνα-τέθηται (pass. sense) Phld.Mus.p.81 K.; Phocian [tense] pf. part. (med. sense)

    ἀνα-τεθεμένος BCH59.202

    ([place name] Daulis):— the [voice] Pass. never occurs in Hom., and is generally rare, κεῖμαι being used instead.
    A in local sense, set, put, place,

    λίθον Il.21.405

    , cf. IG12.373.10, al.;

    θεμείλια Il.12.29

    ; τέρματα τ. Od.8.193; κλισίην, θρόνον τ. τινί, set a stool or chair for him, 4.123, 8.65 (so in [voice] Med., set for oneself,

    δίφρον 20.387

    );

    ἐκελήσατο θέμεν τὰν κλίναν, ἐφ' ἇς τὰν Σωστράταν ἔφερον

    lay down,

    IG42(1).122.31

    (Epid., iv B.C.); πόδα τ. plant the foot, i.e. walk, run, A.Eu. 294, E.IT32: so in [voice] Med., τετράποδος βάσιν θηρὸς τιθέμενος, i.e. going on all fours, Id.Hec. 1059 (lyr.): the mode is expressed by Advbs. or Preps.,
    a with Advbs., τ. τι πυρὸς ἐγγύς, ἀπάνευθε πυρός, Od.14.518, Il.18.412;

    προπάροιθε ποδῶν 20.324

    ;

    χαμαὶ τ. τὸν πόδα A.Ag. 906

    ; τὰ ἄνω κάτω and τὰ κάτω ἄνω τ. Hdt.3.3, cf. A.Eu. 651, etc.: with Advbs. implying motion,

    ἄλλοσε θῆκε Od.23.184

    , 204;

    ἔχεις.. ὅποι θήσεις Pl.R. 479c

    :—[voice] Med.,

    ὅποι.. τιθοῖτο X.Mem.3.8.10

    .
    b with Preps. of local sense,

    θεῖσα στέφανον ἀμφὶ βοστρύχοις E.Med. 1160

    ([voice] Med.,

    ἀμφ' ὤμοισι τιθήμενον ἔντεα Il.10.34

    ); ἀνά τινι or τι, as

    ἂμ βωμοῖσι Il.8.441

    ;

    ἀνὰ μυρίκην 10.466

    ; ἐπί τινος, τινι, or τι, as

    εἵματα ἐπ' ἀπήνης Od.6.252

    , cf. Il.16.223, etc.;

    ἐπὶ κρατὶ κυνέην 15.480

    ;

    πέπλον Ἀθηναίης ἐπὶ γούνασι 6.92

    (v. infr.111.2); ἐπὶ [θρόνον τὰ ἱμάτια] Hdt.1.9, cf. A.Supp. 483, etc.; τὴν ἀρχὴν (sc. τοῦ ἐπιδέσμου) κατὰ μεσοφρύου, ἐπὶ ἰνίον, etc., Sor.Fasc.1,2, al.; ὑπό τινι or τι, as

    δέμνι' ὑπ' αἰθούσῃ Il.24.644

    ;

    ἀμβροσίην ὑπὸ ῥῖνά τινι Od.4.445

    : most freq. with the Preps. ἐν or εἰς, put in or put into.., as

    θῆκεν ἐν ἀκμοθέτῳ ἄκμονα Il.18.476

    ;

    τόξα ἐν πυρί 5.215

    ;

    ἐν κίστῃ ἐδωδήν Od.6.76

    ; ἐν λεχέεσσι θ. [τινά] Il.18.352 (so in [voice] Med., ἐς δίφρον ἄρνας θέτο put into the car, 3.310;

    ὁ θεὸς ἔθετο τὰ μέλη ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 Ep.Cor.12.18

    ); ἐς λάρνακα, ἐς κάπετον, Il.24.795, 797;

    ἐς ταφάς S.Aj. 1110

    ([voice] Med.,

    ἐν τάφοισι θέσθε Id.OC 1410

    ), cf. Ant. 504, Tr. 1254.
    c in Poets also with dat. only,

    χρήματα μυχῷ ἄντρου Od.13.364

    (so in [voice] Med.,

    κολεῷ ἄορ θέο 10.333

    ), cf. S.Tr. 691, E.Hel. 1064.--The same constructions will be found under many of the following heads.
    II Special phrases:
    1 θεῖναί τινί τι ἐν χερσίν, ἐν χειρί, put it in his hands, Il.1.441, 585, etc.; ἐν χερσί or

    χείρεσσί τινος 6.482

    , 23.597;

    οἶνον Ὀδυσσῆϊ ἐν χείρεσσι Od.14.448

    ; ἐς χεῖρά τινος into his hand, S.Aj. 751.
    2 of women, θέσθαι παῖδα, υἱὸν ὑπὸ ζώνῃ, to have a child put under her girdle, i.e. to conceive, h.Ven. 255, 282.
    3 ἐν ὄμμασι θέσθαι set before one's eyes, Pi.N.8.43.
    4 set a plant, X.Oec.19.7,9.
    b lay a mosaic, PCair.Zen.665.10,15 (iii B.C.).
    5 θέσθαι τὴν ψῆφον lay one's voting-pebble on the altar, put it into the urn,

    ἐς τεῦχος οὐ διχορρόπως ψήφους ἔθεντο A.Ag. 816

    : hence simply, give one's vote, ἐπὶ φόνῳ for death, E.Or. 756 (troch.); ἑωυτῷ in one's own favour, Hdt.8.123;

    σὺν τῷ νόμῳ X.Cyr.1.3.17

    ; εὔφρονα, δικαίαν τὴν ψῆφον τ., A.Supp. 640 (lyr.), Lycurg.128, etc.; and in [voice] Pass.,

    ἔστω δὴ φανερὰ ἡ ψῆφος τιθεμένη Pl.Lg. 855d

    : also γνώμην θέσθαι, c. inf., give one's opinion, Hdt.7.82;

    περὶ ἡμῶν And.3.21

    : τίθεσθαι abs., vote,

    γνώμῃ S.Ph. 1448

    codd. (anap., γνώμην Lambinus), Hld.2.29;

    μετά τινος A.Supp. 644

    (lyr.);

    ἐναντία τινί Pl.Phlb. 58b

    ; τινι S.E.P.2.37 codd., Lib.Decl.1.65.
    6 in Hom., θεῖναί τινί τι ἐν στήθεσσι, ἐν φρεσί, etc., put or plant it in his heart,

    ἐν στήθεσσι τιθεῖ νόον Il.13.732

    ; βουλὴν ἐν στήθεσσι τ. 17.470;

    ἔπος ἐν φρεσί 19.121

    , al.; also

    μένος δέ οἱ ἐν φρεσὶ θῆκε 21.145

    :—[voice] Med., ἄγριον ἐν στήθεσσι θέτο θυμόν laid up wrath in his heart, treasured it there, 9.629;

    ἐν φρεσὶ θέσθε αἰδῶ καὶ νέμεσιν 13.121

    ; τοῖσιν κότον αἰνὸν ἔθεσθε harboured enmity against them, 8.449;

    καθαρὸν θέμενος νόον Thgn.89

    ;

    θέμενος ἄγναμπτον νόον A.Pr. 164

    (lyr.); ἐνὶ φρεσὶ θέσθαι, c. inf., bear in mind, think of doing a thing, Od.4.729;

    θ. [τι] ἐν καρδίᾳ Ev.Luc. 1.66

    .
    7 deposit, as in a bank,

    τὰ πρυτανεῖα πρὸς τοὺς ἄρχοντας IG12.22.33

    ;

    θεὶς ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν τὰς τετταράκοντα μνᾶς Hyp.Ath.5

    ;

    ἐνέχυρον τιθέναι τι Ar.Pl. 451

    , cf. Ec. 755, D.41.11, PEnteux.32.7 (iii B.C.), etc.:—[voice] Med.,

    τὰ ἡμίσεα τῆς οὐσίης θέσθαι παρά τινα Hdt.6.86

    .ά, cf. Od.13.207;

    τὴν τιμὴν θήσονται ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν, ἕως.. PCair.Zen.723.11

    (iii B.C.);

    ἐγγύην θέσθαι A.Eu. 898

    ;

    συνθήκας παρά τινι Lycurg.23

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    τὰ ληφθέντα καὶ τὰ τεθεντα D.49.5

    (but [voice] Act. and [voice] Med. are sts. distd., ὁ θείς the mortgagor, ὁ θέμενος the mortgagee,

    τοὺς θέντας ἡμᾶς ἢ καὶ τοὺς θεμένους ὑμᾶς Pl.Lg. 820e

    , cf. Hyp.Fr. 169, D.53.10; τίθεσθαι seems to have the same meaning as ὑποτίθεσθαι in IG22.43.41, 2758.4, 12(7).55.12 (Arcesine, iv/iii B.C.), but the two are distd. in Supp.Epigr.3.760 (Euboea, iv B.C.)): metaph., χάριν or χάριτα θέσθαι τινί deposit a claim for favour with one, lay an obligation on one, Hdt.9.60, 107, cf. A.Pr. 783, etc.
    8 pay down, pay, τόκον, εἰσφοράν, μετοίκιον, D.41.9, 22.43, 29.3;

    τὸ γιγνόμενον Id.18.104

    ;

    τὸν πριάμενον ἑκατοστὴν τιθέναι τῆς τιμῆς Thphr.Fr.97.1

    ;

    τὴν τιμήν PRev.Laws 18.13

    (iii B.C.);

    τὰ μέρη PCair.Zen.218.33

    (iii B.C.); [τὰς δραχμὰς] εἰς ἀνήλωμα τοῦ πλοίου ib.753.64 (iii B.C.):—[voice] Med.,

    θέμενος ἀρραβῶνα PFlor.303.3

    (vi A.D.).
    10 in military language, τίθεσθαι or θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα has four senses,
    a rest arms, i.e. halt, with arms in an easy position but ready for action, Th.4.44,93, 7.3; θέμενοι ἐς τὴν ἀγορὰν τὰ ὅπλα advancing to the market-place and resting arms there, Id.2.2, cf. Hdt.9.52, X.An.1.5.14, 17, 1.6.4, etc.; εἰς τάξιν τὰ ὅπλα τ. ib.2.2.21, 5.4.11; so ἐν τάξει ib.2.2.8; ἀντία τισί over against them, Hdt.5.74 (in 1.62 ἀντία ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα over against it (the temple)); poet., πάτρας ἕνεκα εἰς δῆριν ἔθεντο ὅπλα Inscr. ap. D.18.289.
    b bear arms, fight,

    τὸ θυμοειδὲς.. ἐν τῇ τῆς ψυχῆς στάσει τίθεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα πρὸς τὸ λογιστικόν Pl.R. 440e

    ;

    τοῦ δήμου.. παρακαλοῦντος τοὺς στρατιώτας τίθεσθαι πρὸς τὴν πόλιν IG22.666.10

    ;

    ὃς ἂν μὴ θῆται τὰ ὅπλα μηδὲ μεθ' ἑτέρων Arist.Ath.8.5

    , cf. Lys.31.14, D.21.145; so ὁπόσοιπερ ἂν ὅπλα ἱππικὰ ἢ πεζικὰ τιθῶνται who serve on horseback or on foot, Pl.Lg. 753b, cf. 756a;

    ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ τὰ ὅπλα θέσθαι Plu.Cim.5

    .
    c lay down one's arms, surrender, D.S.20.31,45; so, without the idea of surrender, θέσθαι τὰς ἀσπίδας X.HG2.4.12 (but [voice] Act.,

    τὰ ὅπλα θείς Plu.2.759a

    ).
    II lay in the grave, bury,

    ἐμὰ σῶν ἀπάνευθε τιθήμεναι ὀστέα 23.83

    (freq. with words added, ἐν τάφοισι, ἐς ταφάς, etc., v. supr. 1 b); ποῦ σφε θήσομεν χθονός; A.Th. 1006 (lyr.):— [voice] Pass.,

    τὰ δὲ ὀστᾶ φασι.. τεθῆναι.. ἐν τῇ Ἀττικῇ Th.1.138

    , cf. Pl.Mx. 242c, Lg. 947e;

    ἄλλῳ δὲ μηδενὶ ἐξεῖναι ἐν τῷ πυργίσκῳ τεθῆναι μετὰ τὸ ἐνταφῆναι αὐτήν· ἐπεὶ ὁ θείς τινα ἀσεβὴς ἔστω θεοῖς καταχθονίοις TAM 2(1).51

    ([place name] Telmessus), cf. 55, al., AJP48.30 ([place name] Apamea), Supp.Epigr. 6.221 ([place name] Phrygia), etc.
    12

    τιθέναι τὰ γόνατα

    kneel down,

    Ev.Marc. 15.19

    , Ev.Luc.22.41, al.
    III set up, of the prizes in games,

    ἄεθλα Il.23.263

    , etc.; ἀέθλιον ib. 748;

    νικητήρια S.Fr. 537

    (so in [voice] Pass., τὰ τιθέμενα the prizes, D.61.25); also with the object offered as the prize, τ. δέπας, βοῦν, σόλον, etc., Il.23.656, 750, 826, al., cf. Hdt. 1.144, S.Aj. 573:—this is more fully expressed by ἐς μέσσον τ., Il.23.704: after Hom. more generally, lay before people as common property,

    βούλομαι ὑμῖν εἰς τὸ μέσον αὐτὸ θεῖναι Pl.Lg. 719a

    ;

    ἐς μέσον ἀρχὴν τιθεὶς ἰσονομίην ὑμῖν προαγορεύω Hdt.3.142

    ; so also

    τ. τι εἰς τὸ κοινὸν X.Mem.3.14.1

    ; reading and sense are doubtful in A.Ch. 145.
    2 set up in a temple, dedicate,

    ἀγάλματα Od.12.347

    ;

    τάσδε.. θεοῖς ἀσπίδας ἔθηκε E.Ph. 576

    ; so perh. Il.6.92 (v. supr. 1b).
    IV assign, award,

    τιμήν τινι Il.24.57

    ;

    ὄνομά τινι Pl.Sph. 244d

    : esp. in [voice] Med., ὄνομα (or οὔνομα) θέσθαι τινί give a child a name at one's own discretion, Od.18.5, 19.406 (in 19.403 with v.l. θείης), Hdt.1.107, 113, cf. E.Ph.13: ellipt., without

    ὄνομα, ᾧ δὴ ἀθροίς ματι ἄνθρωπόν τε τίθενται καὶ λίθον Pl.Tht. 157b

    , cf. Cra. 402b: pleonast.,

    Ἴωνα δ' αὐτὸν ὄνομα κεκλῆσθαι θήσεται E. Ion75

    .
    V τιθέναι νόμον down or give a law, of a legislator, S.El. 580, E.Alc.57, Ar.Ach. 532, Pl.R. 339c, D.24.99, etc.:—so in [voice] Med., of Solon, Hdt.1.29; of a people, state, or legislature, give oneself a law, make a law, Pl.R. 338e, Isoc.3.6, Arist. Pol. 1289a14 ([voice] Pass.,

    τίθεται νόμος Ar.Nu. 1425

    , Pl.Lg. 705e, 744a; τιμωρίαι.. ἐτέθησαν ib. 943d); also

    θήσω θεσμόν A.Eu. 484

    ;

    κήρυγμα θεῖναι S.Ant.8

    ; σκῆψιν τιθέναι allege an excuse, Id.El. 584: c. acc. et inf., order matters so that.., [

    ὁ Λυκοῦργος] ἔθηκε θύειν βασιλέα πρὸ τῆς πόλεως τὰ δημόσια ἅπαντα X.Lac.15.2

    , cf. 1.5, 2.11; without inf.,

    καλῶς ἔθεντο ταῦτα πατέρες οἱ πάλαι E.Or. 512

    : c. dat. et inf.,

    γυναιξὶ σωφρονεῖν.. θήσει Id.Tr. 1057

    .
    2 [voice] Med., agree upon,

    ἡμέραν θέσθαι D.42.1

    ,13; so θ. συγγραφήν, ὁμολογίαν, σύμβολόν τινι, etc., PEleph. 2.16 (iii B.C.), PGoodsp.Cair. 6ii 2 (ii B.C.), PRein.11.9 (ii B.C.), etc.
    3 execute a document. τ. διαθήκην make a will, Stud.Pal.1.6.3 (v A.D.): so in [voice] Med., PSI10.1119.16 (ii A.D.); θέσθαι τινὸς ἀπαρχήν make out a person's birth-certificate, ib.9.1067.15 (iii B.C.), etc.
    VI establish, institute,

    ἀγῶνας A.Ag. 845

    , cf. X.An.1.2.10; ἐν τοῖς ἀγώνοις οἷς ἁ πόλις τίφητι (sic) Delph.3(3).120.17 (ii B.C.);

    πενταετηρίδα Pi.O.3.21

    .
    VII dispose, order, ordain, bring to pass, of gods,

    οὕτω νῦν Ζεὺς θείη Od.8.465

    , 15.180;

    ὣς ἄο' ἔμελλον θησέμεναι Il.12.35

    ; [

    Ζεὺς] τίθησ' ὅπῃ θέλει Semon.1.2

    ; τὰ δ' ἄλλα πάντ' ἄνω τε καὶ κάτω στρέφων τίθησιν (sc. Ζεύς) A.Eu. 651; πάντα παγκάκως θεοὶ θέσαν cj. in Id.Pers. 283 (lyr.);

    τέλος δ' ἔθηκε Ζεὺς.. καλῶς S.Tr. 26

    ; κόσμῳ θέντες, as etym. of θεοί, Hdt.2.52; of human beings, administer, manage, [τι] κακῶς θέμεν, εὖ θέμεν, Thgn.845, 846;

    τὰ δ' ἄλλα φροντὶς.. θήσει δικαίως A.Ag. 913

    ; ἐγὼ καὶ σὺ θήσομεν κρατοῦντε τῶνδε δωμάτων καλῶς ib. 1673 (troch.);

    ταῦτ' ἐγὼ θήσω καλῶς E.Hipp. 521

    , cf. Andr. 737;

    τὰ παρ' ὑμῶν εὖ τίθει Ar.Lys. 243

    ;

    τ. τὰ τῶν φίλων ἀσφαλῶς X.Ages.11.12

    ;

    τὰ πράγματ' ὀρθῶς ἂν τιθῇ πράξει καλῶς E.Fr. 287

    :—[voice] Med., administer for oneself,

    οἶκον εὖ θέσθαι Hes.Op.23

    ;

    ἄνδρας σοφοὺς χρὴ τὸ παρὸν πρᾶγμα καλῶς εἰς δύναμιν τίθεσθαι Cratin. 172

    (lyr.), cf. D.23.134, Anon.ap Suid.s.v. τίθεσθαι, Hsch.s.v.

    τὸ παρὸν εὖ τίθεσο; ἐν ἀπόρῳ εἴχοντο θέσθαι τὸ παρόν Th.1.25

    ; τὸ παρὸν εὖ θέσθαι make the best of one's resources or situation, Luc.Nec.21, M. Ant.6.2, cf. Aristid.2.35 J.;

    εὐτυχίαν τὴν παροῦσαν ἔξεστι καλῶς θέσθαι Th.4.17

    ;

    τὰ παρόντα θέσθαι καλῶς Ach.Tat.5.11

    ;

    τὰ σεωυτοῦ τιθέμενος εὖ Hdt.7.236

    ;

    τὰ οἰκεῖα εὖ θέμενον Pl.R. 443d

    ;

    τὰ ἴδια ἕκαστοι εὖ βουλόμενοι δὴ θέσθαι Th.4.59

    ;

    τὰ πάντα ὅπως ἂν αὐτῇ ἡδὺ ᾖ οὕτως τίθεσθαι X.Mem.1.4.17

    ;

    εἰ μὴ θήσομαι τἄμ' ὡς ἄριστα E.Andr. 378

    ;

    τὸ σαυτοῦ θέμενος εὖ Id.IT 1003

    , cf. Ba.49, HF 605, 938, Hipp. 709, Dionys.Eleg.1.5;

    τὰ πρὶν εὖ θέμενος S.El. 1434

    ; συνετῶν ἀνδρῶν (sc. εἶναι)

    , πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰ δυσχερῆ, προνοῆσαι ὅπως μὴ γένηται· ἀνδρείων δέ, γενόμενα εὖ θέσθαι Pittac.

    ap. D.L.1.78; τὸ κοινῶς φοβερὸν ἅπαντας εὖ θέσθαι that all should face the common danger, Th.4.61; of wars, quarrels, etc., bring them to a successful issue, but sts. put a good face on them, patch them up,

    ἕως ἂν τὸν πόλεμον εὖ θῶνται Id.8.84

    ;

    θήσονται τὸν πόλεμον ᾗ βούλονται Id.1.31

    ; πόλεμον ἀραμένους οὐ ῥᾴδιον εὐπρεπῶς θέσθαι ib.82;

    ὅτῳ τρόπῳ.. τὸ σφέτερον ἀπρεπὲς εὖ θήσονται Id.6.11

    ;

    μεθ' ἧς τὸ νῦν παρεστὸς νεῖκος εὖ θέσθαι χρεών S. OT 633

    ;

    τὸν τρὸς τοὺς Ἐλευσῖνι πόλεμον ὡς μετρίως ἔθεντο Pl.Mx. 243e

    ; ἄμεινον ἢ τότε ἐθέμεθα τὸν πόλεμον ib. 245e;

    τὰς γενομένας συμφορὰς πρὸς ἀλλήλους θέσθαι καλῶς And.1.140

    : abs.,

    θέσθαι καλῶς S.Fr. 350

    :—pass.,

    εἰ τεθήσεται κατὰ νοῦν τὰ πράγματα Th.4.120

    .
    2 in the game of πεττεία, κυβεία, Lat. tesserae (cf. Ter.Adelph.739), to place as skilfully as possible the pieces which have been assigned to one by the luck of the dice,

    πεττείᾳ τινὶ ἔοικεν ὁ βίος, καὶ δεῖ ὥσπερ ψῆφόν τινα τίθεσθαι τὸ συμβαῖνον Socr.

    ap. Stob.4.56.39;

    ὥσπερ ἐν πτώσει κύβων πρὸς τὰ πεπτωκότα τίθεσθαι τὰ αὑτοῦ πράγματα ὅπῃ ὁ λόγος αἱρεῖ βέλτιστ' ἂν ἔχειν Pl.R. 604c

    , cf. Plu.Pyrrh.26;

    στέργειν δὲ τἀκπεσόντα καὶ θέσθαι πρέπει σοφὸν κυβευτήν S.Fr. 947

    ; τὰ δεσποτῶν γὰρ εὖ πεσόντα θήσομαι I will take advantage of my master's good luck, A.Ag.32: many of the passages cited in A. v11. I may be metaph. applications of this sense.
    B put in a certain state or condition, much the same as ποιεῖν, ποιεῖσθαι, and so often to be rendered by our make:
    I folld. by an attributive Subst., make one something, with the predicate in apposition, θεῖναί τινα αἰχμητήν, ἱέρειαν, μάντιν, etc., Il.1.290, 6.300, Od.15.253, etc.;

    θ. τινὰ ἀρχέπολιν Pi.P.9.54

    ; θεῖναί τινα ἄλοχόν τινος make her another's wife, of a third person who negotiates a marriage, Il.19.298 (for [voice] Med., v. infr. 3); ἥτε με τοῖον ἔθηκεν ὅπως ἐθέλει who has made me such as she will, Od.16.208; σῦς ἔθηκας ἑταίρους thou hast made my comrades swine, 10.338; so [

    νῆα] λᾶαν ἔθηκε 13.163

    , cf. Il.2.319, etc.;

    ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον LXX Ps.109(110).1

    ; but γέλων ἔθηκε συνδείπνοις caused them laughter, E. Ion 1172; λόγους εἰς μέτρα τ. put them into verse, Pl. Lg. 669d.
    2 with an Adj. for the attributive, θεῖναί τινα ἀθάνατον καὶ ἀγήρων make him undying and undecaying, Od.5.136; πηρόν, τυφλόν, ἀφνειὸν τ. τινά, Il.2.599, 6.139, 9.483;

    τὸν μὲν.. θῆκε μείζονά τ' εἰσιδέειν καὶ πάσσονα Od.6.229

    , cf. 18.195, Pl.Prt. 344d.
    b of things, ἅλιον πόνον, πόνον οὐκ ἀτέλεστον, πάντα μεταμώνια, Il.4.26,57, 363;

    ὄλεθρον ἀπευθέα θῆκε Κρονίων Od.3.88

    , cf. 11.274;

    ἀποίητον θέμεν ἔργων τέλος Pi.O.2.17

    ;

    ἀρὰν τ. ἀλαθῆ A.Th. 944

    (lyr.); ἀναστάτους οἴκους τ. S.Ant. 674;

    τ. λεῖον τὸν τραχὺν ἐχῖνον Ar. Pax 1086

    ; τὸ πραχθὲν ἀγένητον τ. Pl.Prt. 324b.
    3 freq. in [voice] Med., γυναῖκα or ἄκοιτιν θέσθαι τινά make her one's wife, Od.21.72, 316, B.5.169; παῖδα τὸν αὑτᾶς πόσιν θ. take her own son as husband, A.Th. 929 (lyr.).
    b υἱὸν θέσθαι τινά, like ποιεῖσθαι, make one's son, adopt, Pl.Lg. 929c, etc.: abs., θέσθαι τινά adopt, Plu.Aem.5.
    4 c. inf., make one do so and so, τιθέναι τινὰ νικᾶσαι make him conquer, Pi.N.10.48 (dub.);

    μετατραπεῖν Id.Fr. 177

    ;

    τὸν πάθει μάθος θέντα κυρίως ἔχειν A.Ag. 178

    (lyr.), cf. 1036, 1174 (lyr.), E.Med. 718, Heracl. 990, etc.
    II in reference to mental action, when [voice] Med. is more freq. than [voice] Act., lay down. assume, hold, reckon or regard as.., τί δ' ἐλέγχεα ταῦτα τίθεσθε; Od.21.333;

    δαιμόνιον αὐτὸ τίθημ' ἐγώ S.El. 1270

    (lyr.);

    τοιοῦτον θέντες τὸν δίκαιον Pl.R. 361b

    , cf. 430b ([voice] Med.); θὲς δή μοι.. now suppose so and so, Id.Tht. 191c;

    εὐεργέτημά τι θεῖναι D.1.10

    ; with

    ὡς, θέντες ὡς ὑπάρχον εἶναι ὃ βούλονται Pl.R. 458a

    , cf. Phd. 100a;

    μὴ τοῦτο ὡς ἀδίκημα θῇς D.18.193

    .
    2 folld. by Advbs., ποῦ χρὴ τίθεσθαι ταῦτα; in what light must we regard these things? S.Ph. 451; οὐδαμοῦ τιθέναι τι hold of no account, E.Andr. 210; πρόσθεν or ἐπίπροσθέν τινος τιθέναι τι, Id.Hec. 129 (anap.), Supp. 515; πόρρω τίθεσθαί τί τινων set far below.., D.18.299.
    3 folld. by Preps.,

    τ. τινὰ ἐν φιλοσόφοις Pl.R. 475d

    ;

    ἐν τοῖς φίλοις X.Mem.2.4.4

    ; also εἰς ὁποτέραν (of two classes) Pl.Sph. 264c; εἰς τὸν δῆμον, εἰς τοὺς πλουσίους, X.Mem.4.2.39; also

    οὐκ ἐν λόγῳ τίθεσθαί τινα Tyrt.12.1

    ;

    ἐν τιμῇ τίθεσθαί τινα Hdt.3.3

    ;

    ἐν αἰτίῃ τιθέναι τινά Id.8.99

    ; ἐν οἰωνῷ τινι τοῦ μέλλοντος, ἐν ἐπαίνῳ, ἐν γέλωτι τίθεσθαι, Plu.Alex.31, Cat.Ma.20, TG17; θέσθαι παρ' οὐδέν set at naught, A.Ag. 230 (lyr.), E.IT 732, cf. Pl.Phdr. 252a (but

    ἐν οὐδενί BGU1816.23

    (i B.C.), Supp.Epigr.7.1.6 (Susa, i A.D., Epist.Artabani));

    ἐν παρέργῳ θοῦ με S.Ph. 473

    ; πάντα ταῦτ' ἐν εὐχερεῖ ἔθου ib. 876;

    ταῦτ' ἐν αἰσχρῷ θέμενος E. Hec. 806

    ;

    ἐν ἀδικήματι θέσθαι τι Th.1.35

    ;

    ἐν ἀδικήματος μέρει τιθέναι τι D.23.148

    ; θέσθαι τὰ δίκαια ἔκ τινος estimate them by.., Id.8.8.
    5 c. inf., οὐ τίθημ' ἐγὼ ζῆν τοῦτον I hold not that he lives, count him not as living, S.Ant. 1166: so in [voice] Med., Pl.Phd. 93c, D. 25.43,44: rarely c. part., θήσω ἀδικοῦντα [αὐτόν] Id.23.76, cf. Pl. Prt. 343e, Ap. 27c.
    6 elliptically, lay down, assume, θῶμεν δύο εἴδη (sc. εἶναι) Id.Phd. 79a, etc.; θήσω οὕτω (sc. εἶναί τι) D.23.85, cf. Arist.Pol. 1290a30.
    C without any attributive word following, make, work, execute, of an artist,

    ἐν δ' ἐτίθει νειόν Il.18.541

    , cf. 550, 561, 607; [

    δόρπον] θησέμεναι Od.20.394

    .
    2 make, cause, bring to pass,

    ἔργα Il.3.321

    ;

    τ. κέλαδον καὶ ἀϋτήν 9.547

    ;

    ὀρυμαγδόν Od.9.235

    ;

    ἔριν μετ' ἀμφοτέροισιν 3.136

    ; φιλότητα, ὅρκια μετ' ἀμφ., Il.4.83, Od.24.546: c. dat. pers.,

    σῆμα τιθεὶς Τρώεσσι Il.8.171

    ;

    Ἀχαιοῖς ἄλγε' ἔθηκεν 1.2

    , etc.;

    πᾶσι δ' ἔθηκε πόνον 21.524

    , cf. 15.721, 16.262;

    φόως ἑτάροισιν 6

    6, etc.;

    χάρματ' ἄλλοις ἔθηκεν Pi.O.2.99

    ;

    πόλει κατασκαφὰς θέντες A. Th.47

    ;

    εἰρήνην φίλοις Id.Pers. 769

    ;

    αἷμα θήσεις E.Ba. 837

    (s. v.l.).
    3 freq. in [voice] Med., make or prepare for oneself, θέσθαι κέλευθον make oneself a road, open a way, Il.12.418;

    θέτο δῶμα Od.15.241

    ; τίθεντο δὲ δαῖτα, δόρπα, Il.7.475, 9.88 (but δαῖτα τίθενται are holding a feast, Od.17.269); μεγάλην ἐπιγουνίδα θέσθαι to make oneself, get a large thigh, Od.17.225; θέσθαι μάχην engage in.., Il.24.402;

    δυσμενέεσσι πόνον καὶ δῆριν ἔθεντο 17.158

    ; ἱδρῶτα τίθεσθαι have an access of perspiration, Hp.Decent.2; μαρτύρια θέσθαι produce as testimony, Hdt.8.55; ἀνδρὸς αἰδοίου πρόσοψιν θηκάμενος putting on the aspect of a reverend man, Pi.P.4.29, cf. Hsch. s.v. θήκατο; πόνον πλέω τίθου work thyself the more annoy, A.Eu. 226;

    εὐκλεᾶ θέσθαι βίον S.Ph. 1422

    , etc.
    4 periphr. for a single Verb. μνηστήρων σκέδασιν θεῖναι make a scattering, Od.1.116; θέμεν κρυφόν, νέμεσιν, αἶνον, for κρύπτειν, νεμεσῦν, αἰνεῖν, Pi.O.2.97, 8.86, N.1.5;

    μὴ σχολὴν τίθει A. Ag. 1059

    ; ὑμῖν ἔθηκε σὺν θεοῖς σωτηρίαν (v.l. προμηθίαν) E.Med. 915:— also in [voice] Med., θέσθαι μάχην, for μάχεσθαι, Il.24.402; θέσθαι θυσίαν, γάμον, for θύειν, γαμεῖσθαι, Pi.O.7.42, 13.53; σπουδήν, πρόνοιαν θέσθαι, S.Aj.13, 536, cf. Pi.P.4.276;

    θ. ἐπιστροφὴν πρό τινος S.OT 134

    ;

    περὶ τούτων οἰκονομίας PEnteux.22.6

    (iii B.C.); and c. gen., θ. λησμοσύναν, συγγνωμοσύνην τινῶν, S.Ant. 151 (lyr.), Tr. 1265 (anap.). (Cf. Lith. dēti 'lay (eggs, etc.)', Skt. dáti 'lay down, place', Lat. -do in con-do, etc., Engl. do, doom.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τίθημι

  • 9 ἐν

    ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.
    marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)
    of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.
    on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.
    within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.
    among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.
    before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).
    esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.
    marker of a state or condition, in
    of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.
    of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.
    marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.
    marker of close association within a limit, in
    fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.
    of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.
    esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.
    marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).
    it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’
    α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).
    β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.
    it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).
    marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).
    marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.
    marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.
    marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)
    gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.
    w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.
    marker of a period of time, in, while, when
    indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.
    point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.
    to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.
    marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.
    marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

  • 10 κύριος

    1
    I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.
    2
    II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.
    one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).
    of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.
    w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.
    one who is in a position of authority, lord, master
    of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.
    of transcendent beings
    α. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).
    β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.
    γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:
    א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.
    ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).
    ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.
    δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.
    ε. of other transcendent beings
    א. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.
    ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κύριος

  • 11 μετά

    μετά [[pron. full] , but [pron. full] in S.Ph. 184 (s. v. l., lyr.)], poet. [full] μεταί, dub., only in μεταιβολία; [dialect] Aeol., [dialect] Dor., Arc. πεδά (q.v.): Prep. with gen., dat., and acc. (Cf. Goth.
    A mip, OHG. miti, mit 'with'.)
    A WITH GEN. (in which use μ. gradually superseded σύν, q.v.),
    I in the midst of, among, between, with pl. Nouns,

    μετ' ἄλλων λέξο ἑταίρων Od.10.320

    ;

    μ. δμώων πῖνε καὶ ἦσθε 16.140

    ;

    τῶν μέτα παλλόμενος Il.24.400

    ;

    πολλῶν μ. δούλων A.Ag. 1037

    ;

    μ. ζώντων εἶναι S.Ph. 1312

    ;

    ὅτων οἰκεῖς μέτα Id.OT 414

    ;

    μ. τῶν θεῶν διάγουσα Pl.Phd. 81a

    (but κεῖσθαι μ. τινός with one, S.Ant.73): sts. the pl. is implied, μετ' οὐδενὸς ἀνδρῶν ναίειν, i.e. among no men, Id.Ph. 1103 (lyr.), etc.
    II in common, along with, by aid of (implying a closer union than σύν)

    , μ. Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο Il.13.700

    , cf. 21.458; συνδιεπολέμησαν

    τὸν πόλεμον μ. Ἀθηναίων IG12.108.7

    ;

    μ. ξυμμάχων ξυγκινδυνεύσειν Th.8.24

    , cf. 6.79, etc.; μ. τῆς βουλῆς in co-operation with the council, IG12.91.10: in this sense freq. (not in ll., Od., Pi., rare in early Gr.) with sg., μετ' Ἀθηναίης with, i.e. by aid of, Athena, h.Hom. 20.2;

    μ. εἷο Hes.Th. 392

    ; μ. τινὸς πάσχειν, δρᾶν τι, A.Pr. 1067 (anap.), S.Ant.70; μ. τινὸς εἶναι to be on one's side, Th.3.56;

    μ. τοῦ ἠδικημένου ἔσεσθαι X.Cyr.2.4.7

    ;

    μ. τοῦ νόμου καὶ τοῦ δικαίου Pl.Ap. 32b

    : generally, with, together with, with Subst. in sg. first in Hdt. (in whom it is rare exc. in the phrase οἱ μ. τινός, v. infr.), as

    κοιμᾶσθαι μ. τινός 3.68

    , Timocl.22.2;

    εὕδειν μ. τινός Hdt.3.84

    ; οἱ μ. τινός his companions, Id.1.86, al., Pl.Prt. 315b: freq. with Prons.,

    μετ' αὐτοῦ S. Ant.73

    ;

    μετ' ἐμοῦ Ar.Ach. 661

    (anap.), etc.: less freq. of things,

    στέγη πυρὸς μ. S.Ph. 298

    ;

    μ. κιθάρας E.IA 1037

    (lyr.);

    μ. τυροῦ Ar.Eq. 771

    , etc.;

    τὴν δίαιταν μεθ' ὅπλων ἐποιήσαντο Th.1.6

    , cf. E.Or. 573;

    ὄχλος μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Ev.Matt.26.47

    : indicating community of action and serving to join two subjects, Κλεομένης μετὰ Ἀθηναίων C. and the Athenians, Th.1.126: with pl. Verb,

    Δημοσθένης μ. τῶν ξυστρατήγων σπένδονται Id.3.109

    , etc.; of things, in conjunction with,

    ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας Pl.R. 591b

    ; γῆρας μ. πενίας ib. 330a.
    III later, in one's dealings with,

    ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μετ' αὐτῶν Act.Ap. 14.27

    ;

    ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔλεος μετ' αὐτοῦ Ev.Luc.10.36

    ;

    τί ἡμῖν συνέβη μ. τῶν ἀρχόντων PAmh.2.135.15

    (ii A.D.): even of hostile action,

    σὺ ποιεῖς μετ' ἐμοῦ πονηρίαν LXX Jd.11.27

    , cf. 15.3;

    πολεμῆσαι μ. τινός Apoc.12.7

    , cf. Apollod.Poliorc.190.4 codd. (but μ. may be a gloss), Wilcken Chr.23.10 (v A.D.), OGI201.3 (Nubia, vi A. D.): to denote the union of persons with qualities or circumstances, and so to denote manner,

    τὸ ἄπραγμον.. μὴ μ. τοῦ δραστηρίου τεταγμένον Th.2.63

    , etc.;

    ἱκετεῦσαι μ. δακρύων Pl.Ap. 34c

    ;

    οἴκτου μέτα S.OC 1636

    ;

    μετ' ἀσφαλείας μὲν δοξάζομεν, μετὰ δέους δὲ.. ἐλλείπομεν Th.1.120

    , cf. IG22.791.12;

    μ. ῥυθμοῦ βαίνοντες Th.5.70

    ; ὅσα μετ' ἐλπίδων λυμαίνεται ib. 103, etc.;

    ψυχὴν ὁσίως βεβιωκυῖαν καὶ μετ' ἀληθείας Pl.Grg. 526c

    , cf. Phdr. 249a, 253d; also, by means of,

    μετ' ἀρετῆς πρωτεύειν X.Mem. 3.5.8

    ;

    γράφε μ. μέλανος PMag.Lond.121.226

    .
    2 serving to join two predicates, γενόμενος μ. τοῦ δυνατοῦ καὶ ξυνετός, i.e. δυνατός τε καὶ ξυνετός, Th.2.15;

    ὅταν πλησιάζῃ μ. τοῦ ἅπτεσθαι Pl.Phdr. 255b

    .
    IV rarely of Time, μ. τοῦ γυμνάζεσθαι ἠλείψαντο, for ἅμα, Th.1.6; μετ' ἀνοκωχῆς during.., Id.5.25.
    B WITH DAT., only poet., mostly [dialect] Ep.:
    I between, among others, but without the close union which belongs to the genitive, and so nearly = ἐν, which is sts. exchanged with it,

    μ. πρώτοισι.. ἐν πυμάτοισι Il.11.64

    :
    1 of persons, among, in company with,

    μετ' ἀθανάτοισι Il.1.525

    ;

    μετ' ἀνθρώποις B.5.30

    ;

    μ. κόραισι Νηρῆος Pi.O.2.29

    ; μ. τριτάτοισιν ἄνασσεν in the third generation (not μ. τριτάτων belonging to it), Il.1.252; of haranguing an assembly,

    μετ' Ἀργείοις ἀγορεύεις 10.250

    , etc.; between, of two parties,

    φιλότητα μετ' ἀμφοτέροισι βάλωμεν 4.16

    .
    2 of things, μ. νηυσίν, ἀστράσι, κύμασιν, 13.668, 22.28, Od.3.91;

    δεινὸν δ' ἐστὶ θανεῖν μ. κύμασιν Hes. Op. 687

    ;

    χαῖται δ' ἐρρώοντο μ. πνοιῇς ἀνέμοιο Il.23.367

    ;

    αἰετὼ.. ἐπέτοντο μ. π. ἀ. Od.2.148

    .
    3 of separate parts of persons, between, μ. χερσὶν ἔχειν to hold between, i.e. in, the hands, Il.11.4, 184, S. Ph. 1110 (lyr.), etc.;

    τὸν μ. χ. ἐρύσατο Il.5.344

    ; ὅς κεν.. πέσῃ μ. ποσσὶ γυναικός, of a child being born, 'to fall between her feet', 19.110; so μ. γένυσσιν, γαμφηλῇσιν, 11.416, 13.200;

    μ. φρεσί 4.245

    , etc.
    II to complete a number, besides, over and above, αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ πέμπτος μ. τοῖσιν ἐλέγμην I reckoned myself to be with them a fifth, Od.9.335, cf. Il.3.188; Οὖτιν.. πύματον ἔδομαι μ. οἷς ἑτάροισι last to complete the number, i.e. after, Od.9.369, cf. A.Pers. 613, Theoc.1.39, 17.84.
    III c. dat. sg., only of collect. Nouns (or the equivalent of such,

    μεθ' αἵματι καὶ κονίῃσιν Il.15.118

    ),

    μ. στροφάλιγγι κονίης 21.503

    ;

    στρατῷ 22.49

    ;

    μ. πρώτῃ ἀγορῇ 19.50

    , etc.;

    μετ' ἀνδρῶν.. ἀριθμῷ Od.11.449

    ;

    μετ' ἄλλῳ λαῷ A.Ch. 365

    (lyr.).
    I of motion, into the middle of, coming into or among, esp. where a number of persons is implied,

    ἵκοντο μ. Τρῶας καὶ Ἀχαιούς Il.3.264

    ;

    μ. φῦλα θεῶν 15.54

    , cf. Od.3.366, al.;

    μ. μῶλον Ἄρηος Il.16.245

    ;

    μ. λαὸν Ἀχαιών 5.573

    , al.; μ. στρατόν, μεθ' ὅμιλον, μεθ' ὁμήγυριν, 5.589, 14.21, 20.142: so of birds, ὥς τ' αἰγυπιὸς μ. χῆνας (though this may be referred to signf. 2), 17.460; of things,

    εἴ τινα φεύγοντα σαώσειαν μ. νῆας 12.123

    ; με μ... ἔριδας καὶ νείκεα βάλλει plunges me into them, 2.376; of place,

    μ. τ' ἤθεα καὶ νομὸν ἵππων 6.511

    ; δράγματα μετ' ὄγμον πῖπτον into the midst of the furrow, 18.552.
    2 in pursuit or quest of, of persons, sts. in friendlysense, βῆ ῥ' ἰέναι μ. Νέστορα went to seek Nestor, Il.10.73, cf. 15.221: sts. in hostile sense, βῆναι μ. τινά to go after, pursue him, 5.152, 6.21, al.; also of things, πλεῖν μ. χαλκόν to sail in quest of it, Od.1.184; ἵκηαι μ. πατρὸς ἀκουήν in search of news of thy father, 2.308, cf. 13.415;

    οἴχονται μ. δεῖπνον Il.19.346

    ; πόλεμον μέτα θωρήσσοντο they armed for the battle, 20.329; ὡπλίζοντο μεθ' ὕλην prepared to seek after wood, 7.418, cf. 420;

    μ. δούρατος ᾤχετ' ἐρωήν 11.357

    ;

    μ. γὰρ δόρυ ᾔει οἰσόμενος 13.247

    .
    II of sequence or succession,
    1 of Place, after, behind, λαοὶ ἕπονθ', ὡς εἴ τε μ. κτίλον ἕσπετο μῆλα like sheep after the bell-wether, Il.13.492, cf. Od.6.260, 21.190, h.Ven.69;

    ἔσχατοι μ. Κύνητας οἰκέουσι Hdt.4.49

    ; μ. τὴν θάλασσαν beyond, on the far side of the sea, Theo Sm.p.122 H.
    2 of Time, after, next to,

    μ. δαῖτας Od.22.352

    ; μεθ' Ἕκτορα πότμος ἑτοῖμος after Hector thy death is at the door, Il.18.96;

    μ. Πάτροκλόν γε θανόντα 24.575

    , cf. Hdt. 1.34;

    μετ' εὐχάν A.Ag. 231

    (lyr.), etc.;

    μ. ταῦτα

    thereupon, there-after,

    h.Merc.126

    , etc.;

    τὸ μ. ταῦτα Pl.Phlb. 34c

    ;

    τὸ μ. τοῦτο Id.Criti. 120a

    ; μετ' ὀλίγον ὕστερον shortly after, Id.Lg. 646c;

    μ. μικρόν Luc. Demon.8

    ;

    μ. ἡμέρας τρεῖς μ. τὴν ἄφεδρον Dsc.2.19

    ;

    μ. ἔτη δύο J.BJ 1.13.1

    ;

    μ. τρίτον ἔτος Thphr.HP4.2.8

    ; μ. χρυσόθρονον ἠῶ after daybreak, h.Merc. 326: but μετ' ἡμέρην by day, opp. νυκτός, Hdt.2.150, cf. Pl.Phdr. 251e, etc.; μεθ' ἡμέραν, opp. νύκτωρ, E.Ba. 485;

    μ. νύκτας Pi.N.6.6

    ; μ. τὸν ἑξέτη καὶ τὴν ἑξέτιν after the boy or girl has attained the age of six years, Pl.Lg. 794c.
    3 in order of Worth, Rank, etc., next after, following [comp] Sup.,

    κάλλιστος ἀνὴρ.. τῶν ἄλλων Δαναῶν μετ' ἀμύμονα Πηλεΐωνα Il.2.674

    , cf. 7.228, 12.104, Od.2.350, Hdt.4.53, X.Cyr.7.2.11, etc.;

    κοῦροι οἳ.. ἀριστεύουσι μεθ' ἡμέας Od.4.652

    , cf. Isoc.9.18: where [comp] Sup. is implied,

    ὃς πᾶσι μετέπρεπε.. μ. Πηλεΐωνος ἑταῖρον Il.16.195

    , cf. 17.280, 351; μ. μάκαρας next to the gods, A.Th. 1080 (anap.); also μάχεσθαι μ. πολλοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων to be inferior in fighting to many.., Philostr.Her.6.
    III after, according to, μ. σὸν καὶ ἐμὸν κῆρ as you and I wish, Il.15.52;

    μετ' ἀνέρος ἴχνι' ἐρευνῶν 18.321

    ;

    μετ' ἴχνια βαῖνε Od.2.406

    .
    IV generally, among, between, as with dat. (B.I), μ. πάντας ὁμήλικας ἄριστος best among all, Il.9.54, cf. Od.16.419;

    μ. πληθύν Il.2.143

    ; μ. τοὺς τετελευτηκότας including those who have died, PLond.2.260.87 (i A.D.);

    μ. χεῖρας ἔχειν Hdt.7.16

    . β', Th.1.138, POxy.901.9 (iv A.D.), cf. X.Ages.2.14, etc.
    D μετά with all cases can be put after its Subst., and is then by anastrophe μέτα, Il.13.301, but not when the ult. is elided, 17.258, Od.15.147.
    E abs. as ADV., among them, with them, Il.2.446, 477, etc.; with him,

    οὐκ οἶον, μ. καὶ Γανυμήδεα A.R.3.115

    .
    II and then, next afterwards, opp. πρόσθε, Il.23.133.
    III thereafter, 15.67, Hdt.1.88, 128, 150, A.Ag. 759 (lyr.), etc.; μ. γάρ τε καὶ ἄλγεσι τέρπεται ἀνήρ one feels pleasure even in troubles, when past, Od.15.400; μ. δέ, for ἔπειτα δέ, Hdt.1.19, Luc.DMort.9.2, etc.
    F μέτα, -μέτεστι, Od.21.93, Parm.9.4, Hdt.1.88, 171, S.Ant. 48,etc.
    I of community or participation, as in μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, usu. c. gen. rei.
    2 of action in common with another, as in μεταδαίνυμαι, μεταμέλπομαι, etc., c. dat. pers.
    II in the midst of, of space or time, as in

    μεταδήμιος, μεταδόρπιος 1

    ; between, as in μεταίχμιον, μεταπύργιον.
    III of succession of time, as in

    μεταδόρπιος 2

    , μετακλαίω, μεταυτίκα.
    IV of pursuit, as in μεταδιώκω, μετέρχομαι.
    V of letting go, as in μεθίημι, μεθήμων.
    VI after, behind, as in μετάφρενον, opp. πρόσθε.
    VII reversely, as in μετατρέπω, μεταστρέφω.
    VIII most freq. of change of place, condition, plan, etc., as in μεταβαίνω, μεταβάλλω, μεταβουλεύω, μεταγιγνώσκω, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μετά

  • 12 πολύς

    πολύς, [dialect] Att. πολλή, πολύ; gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dat. πολλῷ, ῇ, ῷ; acc. πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—[dialect] Ion. [full] πολλός Anacr.43.3,
    A

    πολλή, πολλόν Xenoph.9

    , Democr.219, Hp.VM1, Herod.3.19; also in Trag., S.Ant.86, Tr. 1196; acc. πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: Hdt. uses the [dialect] Ion. forms, but codd. have

    πολύν 2.121

    .δ, 3.57, v.l. in 6.125,

    πολύ 2.106

    ,3.38,6.72,7.46, 160 ( πολύ also in Heraclit.114, Democr. 244):—both sets of forms are found in [dialect] Ep., also gen. sg.

    πολέος Il.4.244

    , etc.: nom. pl.

    πολέες 2.417

    , al., once [var] contr.

    πολεῖς 11.708

    ; gen. πολέων (trisyll.) 5.691, (disyll.) 16.655; dat.

    πολέσι 10.262

    ,al.;

    πολέσσι 13.452

    , al.;

    πολέεσσι 9.73

    , Od.5.54, Hes.Op. 119, etc.; acc. πολέας (trisyll.) Il.3.126, etc., (disyll.) 1.559,2.4, Hes.Op. 580 (freq. with v.l. πολεῖς Il.15.66, etc.); in later [dialect] Ep. πολέες is used as fem., Call.Del.28, also

    πολέας Id.Dian.42

    , A.R.3.21; neut.

    πολέα Q.S.1.74

    (v. infr.):—[dialect] Ep. also have [full] πουλύς (once in Hes., Th. 190, also Thgn. 509, sts. fem. in Hom.,

    πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρήν Il.10.27

    ,

    ἠέρα πουλύν 5.776

    ), neut.

    πουλύ Od.19.387

    ; these forms are found in codd. of Hp. and Aret. (who uses πολύ, πουλύ and πολλόν in neut.), but not in Hdt.:— Lyr. and Trag. (lyr.) sts. use [dialect] Ep. forms, dat. sg.

    πολεῖ A.Supp. 745

    ; nom. pl.

    πολέες B.10.17

    ; neut.

    πολέα A.Ag. 723

    ;

    πολέων E.Hel. 1332

    (fem., B.5.100); dat. pl.

    πολέσι E.IT 1263

    . [ῠalways.]
    I of Number, many, Il.2.417, etc.; ἐκ πολλῶν, opp. ἐξὀλίγων, Hes.Th. 447; τριηκόντων ἐτέων πόλλ' ἀπολείπων wanting many of thirty years, Id.Op. 696;

    παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε Pl.Phd. 58d

    ;

    οὐ πολλοί τινες A.Pers. 510

    : with Nouns of multitude,

    πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.8.109

    ;

    πλῆθος πολλόν Hdt.1.141

    ;

    ἔθνος πολλόν Id.4.22

    ; later πουλὺ.. ἐπ' ἔτος many a year, AP6.235 (Thall.);

    π. ἦν ὁ καταπλέων Plb.15.26.10

    ; of anything often repeated,

    περὶ σέο λόγος ἀπῖκται π. Hdt.1.30

    ;

    πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος Id.2.2

    , cf. 3.137, etc.;

    πολὺ.. τὸ σὸν ὄνομα διήκει πάντας S.OC 305

    ;

    τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ

    often,

    D.21.29

    ; τοῦτο ἐπιεικῶς πολὺ νῦν ἐστι is fairly frequent, Luc.Hist.Conscr.15.
    2 of Size, Degree, Intensity, much, mighty, ὄμβρος, νιφετός, Il.10.6;

    π. ὕπνος Od.15.394

    ;

    πῦρ.. π. 10.359

    ; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il.18.493; π. ὀρυμαγδός, ῥοῖζος, etc., 2.810, Od.9.315, etc.; π. ἀνάγκη strong necessity, E.Ph. 1674; π. γέλως, βοή, much or great, S.Aj. 303, 1149; μωρία ib. 745; ὄλβος, αἰδώς, A.Pers. 251, Ag. 948;

    ἀσφάλεια Th.2.11

    ; ἀλογία, εὐήθεια, Pl.Phd. 67e, Phdr. 275c, etc.
    b rarely of a single person, great, mighty,

    μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.7.14

    , cf. E.Hipp.1; ὁ π. σοφιστής, στρατηγός, Chor.p.23 B., Id.in Rev.Phil.1.68;

    ὁ πάντα π. Id.p.27

    B.; ὁ πολύς alone, of Hippocrates, Gal.19.530; of Trajan, Lyd.Mag.2.28;

    ῥώμην σώματος πολύς D.H.2.42

    .
    c joined with a Verb, Κύπρις γὰρ οὐ φορητός, ἢν πολλὴ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, E.Hipp. 443;

    θρασυνομένῳ καὶ πολλῷ ῥέοντι D. 18.136

    ; from the wind, ὡς π. ἔπνει καὶ λαμπρός was blowing strong and fresh, Id.25.57, cf. Ar.Eq. 760, AP11.49 (Even.): generally, with might or force,

    ὅταν ὁ θεὸς.. ἔλθῃ πολύς E.Ba. 300

    ;

    ἢν π. παρῇ Id.Or. 1200

    ;

    π. καὶ τολμηρὸς ἅνθρωπος D.40.53

    : with part. and εἰμί, πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος was all entreaties, Hdt.9.91;

    ἦν πολλὸς ὑπὸ παντὸς ἀνδρὸς αἰνεόμενος Id.1.98

    ;

    Ἐτεοκλέης ἂν εἷς π... ὑμνοῖθ' A.Th.6

    ;

    π. ἐνέκειτο λέγων Hdt.7.158

    ;

    π. τοῖς συμβεβηκόσιν ἔγκειται D.18.199

    ; also

    π. ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι Hdt.8.59

    ;

    πρὸς ταῖς παρασκευαῖς Plb.5.49.7

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ D.S.14.107

    : without a Prep.,

    π. ἦν τοῖς ἐπαίνοις καὶ ἐπαχθής Aeschin.2.41

    ; π. μὲν γὰρ ὁ Φίλιππος ἔσται will be often mentioned, Id.1.166.
    3 of Value or Worth,

    πολέος δέ οἱ ἄξιος ἔσται Il.23.562

    , cf. Od.8.405;

    πολλοῦ ἄξιος X.An.4.1.28

    , etc.;

    πολλῶν ἄξιος Ar. Pax 918

    ; περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τι, Lat. magni facere, cf.

    περί A.

    IV; ἐπὶ πολλῷ at a high price, D.8.53;

    ἐπὶ π. ἐρραθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; πολύ ἐστί τι it is worth much, of great conscquence, X.Oec.18.7.
    4 of Space, large, wide, π. χώρη, πεδίον, Il.23.520,4.244, etc.; πόντος, πέλαγος, Hes.Op. 635, S.Ph. 635;

    χῶρος πλατὺς καὶ π. Hdt.4.39

    ; λίμνη μεγάλη τε καὶ π. ib. 109;

    π. ἡ Σικελία Th. 7.13

    ;

    π. ἡ Ἑλλάς Pl.Phd. 78a

    , etc.; πολλὸς ἔκειτο he lay outstretched wide, Il.7.156, cf. 11.307; π. κέλευθος a far way, A.Pers. 748 (troch.): without

    ὁδός, πολλὴ μὲν εἰς Ἡράκλειαν.., πολλὴ δὲ εἰς Χρυσόπολιν.. X.An.6.3.16

    : διὰ πολλοῦ, ἐκ πολλοῦ, v. infr. IV.
    5 of Time, long,

    χρόνος S.Aj. 1402

    (anap.), etc.;

    πολὺν χρόνον Il.2.343

    , etc.;

    οὐ π. χρ. S.Ph. 348

    , etc.; so

    πολλοῦ χρόνου Ar.Pl.98

    ;

    χρόνῳ πολλῷ S.Tr. 228

    ; διὰ πολλοῦ (sc. χρόνου) Luc.Nec.15;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ Th.1.58

    , D. 21.41; πρὸ πολλοῦ long before, D.S.14.43;

    οὐ μετὰ πολύ Luc.Tox.54

    ; ἔτι πολλῆς νυκτός while still quite night, Th.8.101; πολλῆς ὥρας late in the day, Plb.5.8.3;

    ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35

    ;

    ἔτι ἔστιν ἡμέρα πολλή LXX Ge.29.7

    .
    II Special usages:
    1 c. partit.gen., e.g. πολλοὶ Τρώων, for πολλοὶ Τρῶες, Il.18.271, etc.; neut., πολλὸν σαρκός, for πολλὴ σάρξ, Od.19.450: in Prose, the Adj. generally takes the gender of the gen.,

    τὸν πολλὸν τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.1.24

    ; τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7;

    τῆς ἀθάρης πολλήν Ar.Pl. 694

    ;

    πολλὴν τῆς χώρας X.Cyr. 3.2.2

    ;

    ὁ π. τοῦ λόγου D.44.6

    ; v. infr. 3.
    2 joined with another Adj.,

    πολλὰ δυστερπῆ κακά A.Ch. 277

    , cf. 585 (lyr.), etc.: more freq. joined to another Adj. by καί, πολέες τε καὶ ἐσθλοί many men and good, Il.6.452, etc.;

    πολέες τε καὶ ἄλκιμοι 21.586

    ;

    πολλὰ καὶ ἐσθλά Od.2.312

    ; παλαιά τε πολλά τε ib. 188;

    ἄκοσμά τε π. τε Il.2.213

    ;

    πολλαί γε.. καὶ ἄλλαι Hes.Th. 363

    ;

    π. τε καὶ κακά Hdt.4.167

    , etc.;

    π. κἀγαθά Ar.Th. 351

    (but

    π. ἀγαθά IG12.76.45

    );

    π. καὶ ἀνόσια Pl.R. 416e

    ;

    π. καὶ μακάρια Id.Plt. 269d

    ;

    π. καὶ πονηρά X.Mem.2.9.6

    ;

    πολλά τε καὶ δεινά Id.An.5.5.8

    ;

    μεγάλα καὶ π. D.36.22

    ; π. καὶ καλοὺς (s.v.l.) κινδύνους, π. καὶ καλὰ παραδείγματα, Din.1.109.
    3 with the Art. (in Hom. without the Art., Il.2.483, 5.334, 22.28), of persons or things well known, Ἑλένα μία τὰς πολλάς, τὰς πάνυ π. ψυχὰς ὀλέσασ' those many lives, A.Ag. 1456 (lyr.), cf. S.OT 845, Th.3.87, Pl.Phd. 88a, Ti. 54a, Act.Ap.26.24: with abstract Nouns,

    τᾶς πολλᾶς ὑγιείας A. Ag. 1001

    (lyr., dub.);

    τὸ πολλόν

    numbers,

    Hdt.1.136

    .
    b οἱ π. the many, i.e. the greater number,

    Ἀθηναῖοι.. ἀπῆλθον οἱ πολλοί Th. 1.126

    , cf. 3.32, etc. (so in sg., ὁ πολλὸς λόγος the prevailing report, Hdt.1.75);

    τοῖς π. κριταῖς S.Aj. 1243

    : with gen., τοῖς π. βροτῶν ib. 682;

    οἱ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων X.Cyr.8.2.24

    ;

    οἱ πολλοὶ ἅπαντες

    far the most,

    Hp.

    Aër.20 (v.l. μάλιστα for ἅπαντες); for τὰ πολλὰ πάντα, v. infr. 111.1a: hence οἱ πολλοί the people, the commonalty, opp. οἱ μείζω κεκτημένοι, Th.1.6; opp. οἱ κομψότεροι, Pl.R. 505b; οἱ π., = Lat. plebs, D.S.20.36; τῶν πολλῶν εἷς one of the multitude, D.21.96; also

    ὁ π. λεώς Luc.JTr.53

    , cf. Rh.Pr.17;

    ὁ π. ὅμιλος Id.Luct.2

    . Hdn.1.1.1, etc.;

    ὁ π. δῆμος Luc.Apol.15

    ;

    ὁ π. ὄχλος Ph. 2.4

    ; ὁ π. alone, = vulgus, v.l. in D.S.2.29; the ordinary man, Epicur.Fr. 478, Phld.Rh.2.154S.;

    νίμμα ὁ π. λέγει, ἡμεῖς ἀπόνιπτρον λέγομεν Phryn.170

    , cf.369; ὁ ἐμπαθὴς καὶ π. ἄνθρωπος 'l'homme moyen sensuel', Herm.in Phdr.p.146A.; ὁ π. ἄνθρωπος (with pl. Verb) the average man, opp. τὸ ἐξαίρετον, Eun.Hist.p.216 D.
    c τὸ πολύ, c. gen.,

    τῆς στρατιῆς τὸ πολλόν Hdt.8.100

    ;

    τὸ π. τοῦ χρόνου Hp.

    Aër. 20;

    τῶν λογάδων τὸ π. Th.5.73

    ;

    τῶν ὅπλων τὸ π. Pl.Plt. 288b

    ; also

    ὁ στρατὸς ὁ πολλός Hdt.1.102

    ;

    ἡ δύναμις ἡ π. Th.1.24

    ; ὁ π. βίοτος the best part of life, S.El. 185 (lyr.).
    d

    τὰ πολλά

    the most,

    Od.22.273

    , and perh. 2.58, 17.537 (elsewh. in Hom. πολλά, as Subst., means much riches, great possessions, Il.11.684, Od.19.195);

    τὰ π. τοῦ πολέμου Th.2.13

    ; πρὸς τὸ τῶν π. μέγεθος in regard to the size of the average, Arist.Rh. 1363b11.
    4 pl. πολλά very much, too much, πολλὰ πράσσειν, = πολυπραγμονεῖν, E.Supp. 576, Ar.Ra. 228;

    π. ἔπαθεν Pi.O.13.63

    , etc.; π. ἔρξαι τινά to do one much harm, A. Th. 923 (lyr.).
    6 πολύς repeated,

    ἦ πολλὰ πολλοῖς εἰμι διάφορος βροτῶν E.Med. 579

    , cf. A.Supp. 451;

    τὰ μὲν οὖν πολλὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου διηγήσασθαι Pl.R. 615a

    , etc.; πολλοῦ πολύς, v. infr. 111.1b: with Advbs. πολλάκις, πολλαχῇ, etc. (qq. v., cf. 111.1 e).
    III Adverbial usages:
    a neut. πολύ ([dialect] Ion. πολλόν) , πολλά, much,

    πόλλ' ἀεκαζομένη Il.6.458

    , etc.; strengthd.,

    μάλα πολλά 8.22

    , al.;

    πάνυ πολύ Pl.Alc.1.119c

    ;

    πολύ τι Id.R. 484d

    ; esp. of repetition, often, Il.2.798, Od.13.29, Hes.Op. 322; so of earnest commands and entreaties, πολλὰ κελεύων, πόλλ' ἐπέτελλον, πολλὰ λισσομένη, πολλὰ μάλ' εὐχομένω, Il.5.528, 11.782, 5.358, 9.183: with the Art.,

    τὸ πολύ

    for the most part,

    Pl.Prt. 315a

    , etc. (but with numerals, at most, Vett. Val.9.5);

    ὡς τὸ π. X.Mem.1.1.10

    , etc.;

    τὰ πολλά Th.1.13

    , 2.11,87, etc.;

    ὡς τὰ π. Id.5.65

    , etc.;

    τὰ π. πάντα Hdt.1.203

    , 2.35, 5.67.
    b of Degree, far, very much,

    ἀπέφυγε πολλὸν τοὺς διώκοντας Id.6.82

    : also abs. gen. πολλοῦ very,

    θρασὺς εἶ πολλοῦ Ar.Nu. 915

    , cf. Eup.74;

    πολλοῦ δύνασθαι Alciphr.1.9

    (s.v.l.); πολλοῦ πολύς, πολλὴ πολλοῦ, much too much, Ar.Eq. 822,Ra. 1046.
    c of Space, a great way, far,

    οὐ πολλόν Hdt.1.104

    ;

    πολὺ οὐκ ἐξῄεσαν Th.1.15

    , etc.
    d of Time, long,

    ὡς πολλὸν τοῦτο ἐγίνετο Hdt.4.126

    , cf. 6.129.
    e of Probability, ἐὰν πολλὰ πολλῶν τέκῃς, perh. = ἐὰν πολλάκις τέκῃς,POxy. 744.9 (i B.C./i A.D.);

    ἐάν τι πολλὰ πολλάκις πάθω Ar.Ec. 1105

    .
    2 πολύ is freq. joined with Adjs. and Advbs.,
    a with a [comp] Comp. to increase its comp. force, πολὺ μεῖζον, πολλὸν παυρότεροι, Il.1.167, Od.14.17; πολὺ μᾶλλον much more, Il.9.700; πολύ τι μᾶλλον f.l. in D.H. Comp.4 (p.22 U.-R.): with words, esp. Preps., between πολύ and its Adj., π. ἐν πλέονι, π. ἐπὶ δεινοτέρῳ, Th.1.35, Pl.R. 589e;

    πολὺ ἔτι ἐκ λαμπροτέρων Id.Phd. 110c

    ;

    π. σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι X.An.3.1.22

    , cf.3.2.30, Smp.1.4 (but the Prep. freq. comes first,

    ἐκ π. ἐλάττονος And.1.109

    , etc.); so πολλῷ is freq. used with the [comp] Comp., by far, A.Pr. 337, Hdt. 1.134, etc.;

    π. μᾶλλον S.OT 1159

    , Pl.Phd. 80e; οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἀσθενέστερον not a great deal weaker, Hdt.1.181, cf. 2.48,67, etc.: πολύ with all words implying comparison, πολὺ πρίν much sooner, Il.9.250;

    π. πρό 4.373

    : with the comp. Verb

    φθάνω, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη 13.815

    ; so πολὺ προβέβηκας ἁπάντων, πολὺ προμάχεσθαι ἁπάντων, 6.125, 11.217;

    προὔλαβε πολλῷ Th.7.80

    : with βούλομαι, = prefer,

    ἡμῖν πολὺ βούλεται ἢ Δαναοῖσι νίκην Il.17.331

    , cf. Od.17.404; πολύ γε in answers, after a [comp] Comp. or [comp] Sup., ἀργὸς.. γενήσεται μᾶλλον; Answ.

    πολύ γε Pl.R. 421d

    , cf. 387e, etc.
    b with a [comp] Sup., πολὺ πρώτιστος, πολλὸν ἄριστος, far the first, etc., Il.2.702, 1.91, etc.;

    προθυμία π. τολμηροτάτη Th.1.74

    , etc.;

    πολλόν τι μάλιστα Hdt.1.56

    ;

    π. δή, π. δὴ γυναῖκ' ἀρίσταν E.Alc. 442

    (lyr.), cf. Ar.Av. 539, Archestr.Fr.34.9; also

    πολλῷ πλεῖστοι Hdt.5.92

    .έ, 8.42;

    π. μεγίστους Id.4.82

    .
    c with a Positive, to add force to the Adj.,

    ὦ πολλὰ μὲν τάλαινα, πολλὰ δ' αὖ σοφή A.Ag. 1295

    ; also

    ἐς πόλλ' ἀθλία πέφυκ' ἐγώ E.Ph. 619

    (troch.);

    πολὺ ἀφόρητος Luc.DMeretr. 9.3

    ; cf. πλεῖστος.
    IV with Preps.,
    1 διὰ πολλοῦ at a great interval of Space or Time, v. διά A.1.5, 11.2.
    2 εἰς πολύ for a long time, Plot.2.1.3.
    3 ἐκ πολλοῦ from a great distance, Th.4.32, etc.; for a long time, v. ἐκ 11.1.
    4 ἐπὶ πολύ,
    a over a great space, far,

    οὐκ ἐπὶ πολλόν Hdt.2.32

    ; ἐπὶ π. τῆς θαλάσσης, τῆς χώρας, Th.1.50,4.3, etc.; to a great extent, Id.1.6,18,3.83; cf.

    ποιέω B.11.2

    .
    b for a long time, long, Id.5.16;

    τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπὶ π. Id.7.38

    , cf. 39.
    c

    ὡς ἐπὶ π.

    very generally,

    Id.1.12

    (v.l.), Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.195;

    ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π.

    for the most part,

    Th.2.13

    , Pl.Plt. 294e, etc.;

    μὴ καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον, ἀλλ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Isoc.4.154

    ;

    τό γ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Id.8.35

    .
    5 παρὰ πολύ by far, v. παρά C.111.5.
    6 περὶ πολλοῦ, v. supr. 1.3.
    7 πρὸ πολλοῦ far before,

    τῆς πόλεως D.H.9.35

    ; also of Time, οὐ πρὸ π. not long before, Id.5.62.
    8 σὺν πολλῷ in no small degree, only too much or too well, Hld.2.8,9.20, 10.9 (cf. CR41.53).
    V for [comp] Comp. πλείων, πλέων, [comp] Sup. πλεῖστος, v. sub vocc. (Cf. Skt. purú-, Goth. filu 'much'.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πολύς

  • 13 δίδωμι

    δίδωμι (Hom.+) by-form διδῶ (B-D-F §94, 1; Rob. 311f) Rv 3:9 (δίδω Tregelles, δίδωμι v.l.), 3 sg. διδοῖ (GrBar 7:2), 3 pl. διδόασι; impf. 3 sg. ἐδίδου, ἐδίδει (Hs 6, 2, 7; cp. Mk 4:8 cod. W), 3 pl. ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδοσαν J 19:3; ptc. διδῶν (Hs 8, 3, 3); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα, subj. 3 sg. δώσῃ J 17:2; Rv 8:3 v.l. (on this W-S.§14, 9; B-D-F §95, 1; Rob. 308f), 1 pl. δώσωμεν Mk 6:37 v.l., 3 pl. δώσωσιν Rv 4:9 v.l.; pf. δέδωκα; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν (and without augm. δεδώκειν Mk 14:44; Lk 19:15; J 11:57); 2 aor. subj. 3 sg. δῷ J 15:16 (δώῃ v.l.); also in the form δώῃ Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 (in both δῷ as v.l.): in all these cases read δώῃ subj., not δῴη opt., s. below; δοῖ Mk 8:37 (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 55; Rdm.2 97f and Glotta 7, 1916, 21ff; GKilpatrick in Festschrift JSchmid ’63, 135), pl. δῶμεν, δῶτε, δῶσιν; 2 aor. opt. 3 sg. Hellenist. (also LXX) δῴη for δοίη Ro 15:5; 2 Th 3:16; 2 Ti 1:16, 18 (on Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 s. above); 2 aor. impv. δός, δότε, inf. δοῦναι, ptc. δούς; pf. δέδωκα LXX. Pass.: 1 fut. δοθήσομαι (W-S. §14, 8ff); 1 aor. ἐδόθην; pf. δέδομαι.
    to give as an expression of generosity, give, donate as a gen. principle: μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν it is more blessed to give than to receive Ac 20:35 (Theophyl. Sim., Ep. 42 τὸ διδόναι ἢ τὸ λαβεῖν οἰκειότερον); cp. 1 Cl 2:1; Hm 2:4ff (the contrast δίδωμι … λαμβάνω is frequently found: Epicharmus, Fgm. 273 Kaibel; Com. Fgm. Adesp. 108, 4 K.; Maximus Tyr. 32, 10c ὀλίγα δούς, μεγάλα ἔλαβες; Sir 14:16; Tat. 29, 2).—On the logion Ac 20:35 s. Unknown Sayings 77–81: giving is blessed, not receiving (cp. EHaenchen on Ac 20:35; Aristot., EN 4, 3, 26; Plut., Mor. 173d). S. μᾶλλον 3c. δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς give to the poor Mt 19:21 (HvonCampenhausen, Tradition u. Leben ’60, 114–56). τινὶ ἔκ τινος give someone some (of a substance: Tob 4:16; Ezk 48:12) Mt 25:8. S. also 7:11; 14:7.
    to give someth. out, give, bestow, grant δ. δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα put a ring on the finger Lk 15:22 (cp. Esth 3:10—δίδωμί τι εἰς τ. χεῖρα also Aristoph., Nub. 506; Herodas 3, 70). give τινί τι someth. to someone τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν Mt 7:6 (Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 33 τὰ ἔγκατα τοῖς κυσὶ δότε).—A certificate of divorce to one’s wife 5:31 (Dt 24:1; conversely of the wife Just., A II, 2, 6 ῥεπούδιον δοῦσα); without dat. 19:7. Of bread (w. dat. or acc. somet. to be supplied fr. the context) 26:26f; Mk 2:26; 14:22; Lk 6:4; 11:7f; 22:19; J 21:13 (difft. Mt 14:19; 15:36; Mk 6:41; 8:6 the disciples transfer to others what they have received). W. inf. foll. δ. τινὶ φαγεῖν give someone someth. to eat Mt 14:16; 25:35, 42; Mk 5:43; 6:37; J 6:31 al. (cp. Gen 28:20; Ex 16:8, 15; Lev 10:17); someth. to drink Mt 27:34; Mk 15:23; J 4:7; Rv 16:6 (Hdt. 4, 172, 4; Aristoph., Pax 49; Jos., Ant. 2, 64; schol. on Nicander, Alexiph. 146 δὸς πιεῖν τί τινι, without dat. 198; PGM 13, 320 δὸς πεῖν[=πιεῖν]; Jos., Ant. 2, 64).—τὰς ῥάβδους GJs 9:1.—Lk 15:29 (Hipponax 43 Deg.).
    to express devotion, give δόξαν δ. θεῷ give God the glory, i.e. praise, honor, thanks (Josh 7:19; Ps 67:35; 1 Esdr 9:8; 2 Ch 30:8 and oft.) Lk 17:18; J 9:24 (practically=promise under oath to tell the truth); Ac 12:23 al. δόξαν καὶ τιμήν (2 Ch 32:33) give glory and honor Rv 4:9. Through a sacrificial offering θυσίαν δ. bring an offering Lk 2:24 (cp. Jos., Ant. 7, 196 θυσίαν ἀποδοῦναι τ. θεῷ).
    to cause to happen, esp. in ref. to physical phenomena, produce, make, cause, give fig. extension of mng. 1 ὑετὸν δ. (3 Km 17:14; Job 5:10; Zech 10:1; PsSol 5:9) yield rain Js 5:18; send rain Ac 14:17. τέρατα cause wonders to appear Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3). Of heavenly bodies φέγγος δ. give light, shine Mt 24:29; Mk 13:24 (cp. Is 13:10). Of a musical instrument φωνὴν δ. (cp. Ps 17:14; 103:12; Jdth 14:9; Pind., N. 5, 50b [93]) produce a sound 1 Cor 14:7f.
    to put someth. in care of another, entrust
    of things entrust τινί τι someth. to someone money Mt 25:15; Lk 19:13, 15; the keys of the kgdm. Mt 16:19; perh. Lk 12:48. W. εἰς τὰς χεῖρας added J 13:3 (cp. Gen 39:8; Is 22:21; 29:12 al.) or ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος 3:35 (cp. Jdth 9:9; Da 1:2; 7:25 Theod.; 1 Macc 2:7). Of spiritual things J 17:8, 14; Ac 7:38.
    of pers. τινά τινι entrust someone to another’s care J 6:37, 39; 17:6, 9, 12, 24; Hb 2:13 (Is 8:18).
    of payment pay, give τινί τι Mt 20:4; 26:15; 28:12; Mk 14:11; Lk 22:5; Rv 11:18. Fig. repay someone (Mélanges Nicole, var. contributors, JNicole Festschr. 1905, p. 246 [HvanHerwerden=PLips 40 III, 3 p. 129] λίθῳ δέδωκεν τῷ υἱῷ μου; Ps 27:4) Rv 2:23. Of taxes, tribute, rent, etc. τινὶ ἀπό τινος pay rent of someth. Lk 20:10 (cp. 1 Esdr 6:28). τὶ pay (up), give someth. Mt 16:26; 27:10; Mk 8:37; δ. κῆνσον, φόρον καίσαρι pay tax to the emperor (Jos., Bell. 2, 403) Mt 22:17; Mk 12:14; Lk 20:22. Of inheritance pay out a portion of property Lk 15:12.
    as commercial t.t. for bookkeeping λόγον δ. render account (POxy 1281, 9 [21 A.D.]; PStras 32, 9 δότω λόγον; cp. Phil 4:15) Ro 14:12.
    of a bank deposit, equivalent to τιθέναι put, place, deposit ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν put money in the bank Lk 19:23.
    appoint to special responsibility, appoint (Num 14:4) κριτάς judges Ac 13:20; w. double acc. appoint someone someth. (PLille 28, II [III B.C.] αὐτοῖς ἐδώκαμεν μεσίτην Δωρίωνα) τοὺϚ μὲν ἀποστόλους some (to be) apostles Eph 4:11. τινὰ κεφαλήν make someone head 1:22. Also δ. τινὰ εἴς τι B 14:7 (Is 42:6).
    to cause someth. to happen, give (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 106 δ. χρόνον εἰς μετάνοιαν) δ. γνῶσιν σωτηρίας= to give (his people) knowledge of salvation = to tell (his people) how to be saved Lk 1:77.
    to bear as a natural product, yield, produce of a field and its crops καρπὸν δ. yield fruit (Ps 1:3) Mt 13:8; Mk 4:7f; fig. ἔδωκεν μοὶ Κύριος καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ GJs 6:3 (Pr 11:30).
    to dedicate oneself for some purpose or cause, give up, sacrifice τὸ σῶμά μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον my body, given up for you Lk 22:19 (cp. Thu. 2, 43, 2; Libanius, Declam. 24, 23 Förster οἱ ἐν Πύλαις ὑπὲρ ἐλευθερίας τ. Ἑλλήνων δεδωκότες τὰ σώματα; of Menas δ. ἀπροφασίστως ἑαυτόν ‘gave of himself unstintingly’ OGI 339, 19f; Danker, Benefactor 321–23; for use of δ. in a testamentary context cp. Diog. L. 5, 72); ἑαυτὸν (τὴν ψυχὴν) δ. give oneself up, sacrifice oneself (ref. in Nägeli 56; 1 Macc 6:44; 2:50) w. dat. 2 Cor 8:5. λύτρον ἀντι πολλῶν give oneself up as a ransom for many Mt 20:28; Mk 10:45 (ἀντί 3). Also ἀντίλυτρον ὑπέρ τινος 1 Ti 2:6. ὐπέρ τινος for or because of a person or thing J 10:15 v.l.; Gal 1:4; Tit 2:14; AcPl Ha 8, 24 (on the form of these passages s. KRomaniuk, NovT 5, ’62, 55–76). ἑαυτὸν δ. τῷ θανάτῳ ISm 4:2 (cp. Just., A I, 21, 2 πυρί); δ. ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θηρίον face the beast Hv 4, 1, 8.
    to cause (oneself) to go, go, venture somewhere (cp. our older ‘betake oneself’) (Polyb. 5, 14, 9; Diod S 5, 59, 4; 14, 81, 2; Jos., Ant. 7, 225; 15, 244) εἰς τὸ θέατρον Ac 19:31; εἰς τὴν ἔρημον GJs 1:4.
    to use an oracular device, draw/cast lots Ac 1:26.
    to grant by formal action, grant, allow, freq. of God (cp. 7 above) ἐξουσίαν δ. (Hippol., Ref. 5, 26, 21 grant someone the power or authority, give someone the right, etc. (cp. TestJob 20:3; Jos., Ant. 2, 90, Vi. 71) Mt 9:8; 28:18; 2 Cor 13:10; Rv 9:3; 1 Cl 61:1; τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω τινός tread on someth. Lk 10:19. τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ γράψαι τὴν ἱστορίαν ταύτην the ability to write this account GJs 25:1. ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἐπί Lk 9:1 (cp. Just., D. 30, 3 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ δύναμιν). ταῦτά σοι πάντα δώσω i.e. put them under your control Mt 4:9 of the devil. Simple δ. w. inf. (Appian, Liby. 19 §78 ἢν [=ἐὰν] ὁ θεὸς δῷ ἐπικρατῆσαι 106 §499) δέδοται it is given, granted to someone γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια to know the secrets Mt 13:11; cp. ἡ δοθεῖσα αὐτῷ γνῶσις B 9:8 (Just., D. 7, 3 εἰ μή τῳ θεός δῷ συνιέναι) ἔδωκεν ζωὴν ἔχειν he has granted (the privilege) of having life J 5:26. μετὰ παρρησίας λαλεῖν to speak courageously Ac 4:29 and oft. Rather freq. the inf. is to be supplied fr. the context (Himerius, Or. 38 [4], 8 εἰ θεὸς διδοίη=if God permits) οἷς δέδοται sc. χωρεῖν Mt 19:11. ἦν δεδομένον σοι sc. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. W. acc. and inf. foll. (Appian, Mithrid. 11, §37; Heliodorus 5, 12, 2 δώσεις με πιστεύειν) οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν you will not permit your holy one to see corruption Ac 2:27; 13:35 (both Ps 15:10). ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι granted that he should be plainly seen 10:40. δὸς … ῥαγήναι τὰ δέσμα grant that our chains be broken AcPl Ha 3,11f. Pregnant constr.: grant, order (Diod S 9, 12, 2 διδ. λαβεῖν=permit to; 19, 85, 3 τὶ=someth.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 125 §524 ὁ καιρὸς ἐδίδου=the opportunity permitted; Biogr. p. 130 ἐδίδου θάπτειν τ. ἄνδρα) ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἵνα μὴ ἀποκτείνωσιν orders were given them not to kill Rv 9:5; cp. 19:8.—Of an oath w. double inf. Lk 1:73f. S. also 17 below.
    to cause to come into being, institute περιτομὴν δ. institute circumcision B 9:7.
    give up, someth. that has been under one’s control for a relatively long time, give up, give back ἡ θάλασσα τ. νεκρούς the sea gave up its dead Rv 20:13.
    to proffer someth., extend, offer χεῖρα hold out one’s hand (to someone) Ac 9:41 (cp. 1 Macc 6:58; 2 Macc 12:11; Jos., Bell. 6, 318). (τὸν) μαστὸν τῇ παῖδι GJs 5:2; 6:3.
    In many phrases this word relates to an activity or an abstract object, and with tr. freq. determined by the noun object; cp. 13 above.
    of humans: of a plan conceived in a meeting give counsel or advice: δ. for ποιεῖν (cp. κατά A2b β and s. s.v. συμβούλιον), which is read by some mss., in συμβούλιον δ. conspired (against Jesus) Mk 3:6. ἀφορμὴν δ. give an occasion (for someth.) 2 Cor 5:12; Hm 4, 1, 11; μαρτυρίαν δ. give testimony 1 Cl 30:7; δ. τὸ μαρτύριον bear witness AcPl Ha 4, 28; γνώμην δ. give an opinion 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 8:10; ἐγκοπὴν δ. cause a hindrance 1 Cor 9:12; ἐντολὴν δ. command, order J 11:57; 12:49; 1J 3:23; ἐντολὴν καινὴν δ. give a new commandment J 13:34; εὔσημον λόγον δ. speak plainly or intelligibly 1 Cor 14:9; παραγγελίαν δ. give an instruction 1 Th 4:2; δ. τὴν ἐν [κυρίῳ σφραγίδα] seal in the Lord AcPl Ha 11, 23 (restored after the Coptic); προσκοπὴν δ. put an obstacle in (someone’s) way 2 Cor 6:3; δ. ἐκδίκησιν take vengeance 2 Th 1:8; ῥάπισμα δ. τινί slap someone J 18:22; 19:3; σημεῖον δ. give a sign Mt 26:48; τόπον δ. τινί make room for someone (Plut., Gai. Gracch. 840 [13, 3]) Lk 14:9; fig. leave room for Ro 12:19 (cp. τόπος 4); Eph 4:27. ὑπόδειγμα δ. give an example J 13:15; φίλημα δ. τινί give someone a kiss Lk 7:45.—δὸς ἐργασίαν Lk 12:58 is prob. a Latinism=da operam take pains, make an effort (B-D-F §5, 3b note 9; Rob. 109), which nevertheless penetrated the popular speech (OGI 441, 109 [senatorial decree 81 B.C.]; POxy 742, 11 [colloq. letter 2 B.C.] δὸς ἐργασίαν; PMich 203, 7; 466, 33f [Trajan]; PGiss 11, 16 [118 A.D.]; PBrem 5, 8 [117/119 A.D.]).
    esp. oft. of God (Hom. et al.) and Christ: give, grant, impose (of punishments etc.), send, of gifts, peace τινί τι Eph 4:8; 1 Cl 60:4; τινί τινος give someone some of a thing Rv 2:17. Also τινὶ ἔκ τινος 1J 4:13. τὶ εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:8 (Ezk 37:14); εἰς τὰς καρδίας put into the hearts Rv 17:17 (cp. X., Cyr. 8, 2, 20 δ. τινί τι εἰς ψυχήν). Also ἐν τ. καρδίαις δ. (cp. ἐν 3) 2 Cor 1:22; 8:16 (cp. Ezk 36:27). εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν Hb 8:10 (Jer 38: 33); ἐπὶ καρδίας Hb 10:16 (δ. ἐπί w. acc. as Jer 6:21, and s. Jer 38:33 ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν γράψω). W. ἵνα foll. grant that Mk 10:37.—The pass. occurs very oft. in this sense (Plut., Mor. 265d; 277e) Lk 8:10; Rv 6:4; 7:2; 13:7, 14f and oft. ἐκδίκησιν διδόναι τινί inflict punishment on someone 2 Th 1:8; βασανισμὸν καὶ πένθος δ. τινί send torment and grief upon someone Rv 18:7; ὄνομα δ. GJs 6:2, χάριν δ. (Jos., Bell. 7, 325) Js 4:6; 1 Pt 5:5 (both Pr 3:34); GJs 14:2; υἱοθεσίαν AcPl Ha 2, 28; 9,12; ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 2, 30f; μεγαλεῖα 6,13. W. gen. foll. over someone Mt 10:1; Mk 6:7; J 17:2.—B. 749. Schmidt, Syn. 193–203. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δίδωμι

  • 14 περισσεύω

    περισσεύω impf. ἐπερίσσευον; fut. περισσεύσω; 1 aor. ἐπερίσσευσα (on the augment B-D-F §69, 4; Mlt-H. 192). Pass.: 1 fut. περισσευθήσομαι (s. prec. two entries; Hes., Thu. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, Philo, Joseph.).
    intr., to be in abundance, abound
    of things
    α. be more than enough, be left over (SIG 672, 19 [II B.C.]; Theophil.: 733 Fgm. 1 Jac. [in Alex. Polyhist.: Eus., PE 9, 34, 19]; Jos., Ant. 3, 229, Vi. 333) τὰ περισσεύσαντα κλάσματα J 6:12. ὁ χρόνος ὁ περισσεύων εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν αὐτοῦ the time that remains before his coming Hs 5, 5, 3. οἱ περισσεύοντες the others, the remainder 9, 8, 7; w. gen. οἱ π. αὐτῶν vs. 4; strengthened οἱ λοιποὶ οἱ περισσεύσαντες 9, 9, 4. τὸ περισσεῦον what was left over τῶν κλασμάτων Mt 14:20; 15:37 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 55). περισσεύει μοί τι I leave someth. (cp. Tob 4:16) J 6:13. τὸ περισσεῦσαν αὐτοῖς κλασμάτων what they left in the way of fragments Lk 9:17.
    β. be present in abundance (X., Cyr. 6, 2, 30; PFlor 242, 2; PLond II, 418, 4 p. 303 [c. 346 A.D.] ἵνα περισσεύῃ ὁ φόβος τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν σοί) 2 Cor 1:5b; Phil 1:26 ἐὰν μὴ περισσεύσῃ ὑμῶν ἡ δικαιοσύνη πλεῖον τῶν γραμματέων unless your righteousness far surpasses that of the scribes Mt 5:20 (for the omission of ‘that’ in the Gk. text cp. Maximus Tyr. 15, 8d: their life is different in no respect σκωλήκων=fr. ‘that’ of the worms). περισσεύει τί τινι (cp. Thu. 2, 65, 13) someone has someth. in abundance (Tob 4:16) ISm 9:2. τὸ περισσεῦόν τινι (opp. ὑστέρησις) someone’s abundance Mk 12:44. (Opp. ὑστέρημα) Lk 21:4. ἐν τῷ περισσεύειν τινί in this, namely that one has an abundance 12:15. περισσεύει τι εἴς τινα someth. comes or is available to someone in great abundance: ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν Ro 5:15. περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς we share abundantly in Christ’s sufferings 2 Cor 1:5a.
    γ. be extremely rich or abundant, overflow 2 Cor 9:12. εἰ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτου if by my falsehood the truthfulness of God has shown itself to be supremely great, to his glory Ro 3:7. The thing in which the wealth consists is added in the dat. (Philistion [IV B.C.], Fgm. 9 ln. 13 Wellmann πάσαις τ. ἀρεταῖς περιττεύει [in Athen. 3, 83, 115e]) π. δόξῃ be extremely rich in glory 2 Cor 3:9 (v.l. ἐν δόξῃ). In oxymoron ἡ πτωχεία αὐτῶν ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν their poverty has overflowed into the wealth of their ingenuousness 8:2 (s. ἁπλότη 1; NRSV et al. liberality).
    δ. grow αἱ ἐκκλησίαι ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθʼ ἡμέραν Ac 16:5. ἵνα ἡ ἀγάπη ὑμῶν ἔτι μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον περισσεύῃ ἐν ἐπιγνώσει Phil 1:9.
    of persons
    α. have an abundance, abound, be rich τινός of or in someth. (B-D-F §172; Rob. 510) ἄρτων Lk 15:17 v.l. (the text has the mid. περισσεύονται [unless it should be pass., s. 2b below], but that is prob. not orig.; s. Jülicher, Gleichn. 346). παντὸς χαρίσματος IPol 2:2. Also ἔν τινι Dg 5:13 (opp. ὑστερεῖσθαι). ἐν τῇ ἐλπίδι Ro 15:13. Abs. (opp. ὑστερεῖσθαι) περισσεύομεν we have more (divine approval) 1 Cor 8:8. ζητεῖτε ἵνα περισσεύητε strive to excel 14:12. Cp. Phil 4:12a (opp. ταπεινοῦσθαι), vs. 12b (opp. ὑστερεῖσθαι). ἀπέχω πάντα καὶ περισσεύω I have received full payment, and have more than enough vs. 18. π. εἰς πᾶν ἔργον have ample means for every enterprise 2 Cor 9:8b.
    β. be outstanding, be prominent, excel (1 Macc 3:30) ἔν τινι in someth. ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 15:58. Cp. 2 Cor 8:7ab; Col 2:7. Abs. w. μᾶλλον added progress more and more 1 Th 4:1, 10.
    trans. (Athen. 2, 42b) to cause someth. to exist in abundance, cause to abound
    of things that one greatly increases, τὴν εὐχαριστίαν 2 Cor 4:15. τὶ εἴς τινα grant someth. to someone richly 9:8a; Eph 1:8 (ἧς by attraction of the relat. for ἥν). Pass. w. dat. of pers. ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται to the one who has (more) will be given, and that person will have a great abundance Mt 13:12. Cp. 25:29.
    of persons who receive someth. in great abundance ὑμᾶς ὁ κύριος περισσεύσαι τῇ ἀγάπῃ may the Lord cause you to abound in love 1 Th 3:12. πόσοι μίσθιοι περισσεύονται ἄρτων Lk 15:17 how many day laborers get more than enough bread (s. 1bα above).—DELG s.v. περί. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > περισσεύω

  • 15 λέγω

    λέγω (Hom.+; on the mng. of the word ADebrunner, TW IV 71–73) impf. ἔλεγον (3 pl. ἔλεγαν s. B-D-F §82 app.; Mlt-H. 194; KBuresch, RhM 46, 1891, 224). Only pres. and impf. are in use; the other tenses are supplied by εἶπον (q.v., also B-D-F §101 p. 46; Mlt-H. 247), but the foll. pass. forms occur: fut. 3 sg. λεχθήσεται; aor. ptc. fem. sg. λεχθεῖσα (SyrBar 14:1), neut. pl. τὰ λεχθέντα (Jos. 24, 27; Esth 1:18; Papias, Just.), 3 sg. ἐλέχθη and pl. ἐλέχθησαν; pf. 3 sg. λέλεκται; plupf. ἐλέλεκτο; pf. ptc. λελεγμένος (all Just.; B-D-F §101) ‘say’ (beginning w. Hes. [Hom. uses the word in the senses ‘gather, collect’, as Il. 11, 755 al., and mid. ‘select’, as Il. 21, 27, and esp. of stories that one elects to ‘tell over’ or ‘recount’, as Od. 14, 197] and more freq. in Pind.; the usual word since the Attic writers; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.).
    to express oneself orally or in written form, utter in words, say, tell, give expression to, the gener. sense (not in Hom., for this εἶπον, ἐν[ν]έπω, et al.)
    w. an indication of what is said
    α. in the acc. ταύτην τ. παραβολήν Lk 13:6. (τὴν) ἀλήθειαν (Teles p. 4, 14; TestAbr A 16 p. 97, 27 [Stone p. 42]) J 8:45f; Ro 9:1; 1 Ti 2:7. ἀληθῆ (cp. Herodian 4, 14, 4) J 19:35. παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν 16:29. τὶ καινότερον Ac 17:21 (w. ἀκούω as Pla., Prot. 310a; Dio Chrys. 3, 28; 4, 37). τί λέγουσιν what they say Mt 21:16; cp. Lk 18:6; 1 Cor 14:16. τί λέγω; what shall I say? Hb 11:32. ὸ̔ λέγει Lk 9:33; cp. 2 Ti 2:7; Phlm 21. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7; AcPlCor 1:9. ταῦτα (τοῦτο) λ. (Jos., Vi. 291) Lk 9:34; 11:45b; 13:17; J 2:22; τοιαῦτα λ. Hb 11:14. τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν be in agreement (not only in words: Thu. 4, 20, 4; 5, 31, 6; Polyb. 2, 62, 4; 5, 104, 1; Jos., Ant. 18, 375; 378) 1 Cor 1:10.—Also τινί τι tell someone someth. παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς Lk 18:1. μυστήριον ὑμῖν 1 Cor 15:51. τ. ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν J 16:7. ὸ̔ λέγω ὑμῖν Mt 10:27. μηδενὶ λ. τοῦτο Lk 9:21. οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν they say nothing to him J 7:26. ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 2 Th 2:5.—τὶ πρός τινα (Pla, Gorg. 465a) παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 5:36; cp. 14:7; 20:9.—24:10; 11:53 v.l. W. double acc. ἀδύνατα ταῦτα εἴρηκας Hm 11:19.
    β. by direct discourse or direct question foll., mostly abs. (extremely freq.) Mt 9:34; 12:44; Mk 3:30; Lk 5:39; J 1:29, 36; 1 Cor l2:3; Js 4:13. Also oft. introduced by recitative ὅτι Mt 9:18; Mk 1:15; 2:12; 3:21f; 5:28; 6:14f (on the textual problem s. FNeirynck, ETL 65, ’89, 110–18), 35; 7:20; Lk 1:24; 4:41; 17:10; 21:8 v.l.; J 6:14; 7:12; 8:33; Ac 2:13; 11:3 and oft.—καὶ ἔλεγεν Mk 4:21, 24, 26, 30 may = he used to say (so that they might memorize): WEssame, ET 77, ’66, 121.
    γ. by indirect discourse or indirect question foll.; abs. Mt 21:27; Mk 11:33c; Lk 20:8.—Introduced by ὅτι (Diod S 11, 4, 3; 11, 6, 2; 14, 4, 3; Petosiris, Fgm. 14c; Jos., Bell. 4, 543) Lk 22:70; Ac 20:23.—In acc. w. inf. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου; Mt 16:13; cp. vs. 15; Lk 9:20; 11:18; 23:2b; 24:23b; J 12:29a; Ac 4:32; 8:9; 17:7.—W. the inf. only Lk 24:23a; Js 2:14; 1J 2:6, 9.
    w. indication of the pers. or thing about which someth. is said, or that is meant by someth.
    α. by a prep. περί τινος (Soph., Thu. et al.) οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει the Pharisees perceived that he was talking about them Mt 21:45. λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ he said concerning him J 1:47; cp. 2:21; 11:13; 13:18, 22. εἴς τινα (Eur., Med. 453; X., Mem. 1, 5, 1) Ac 2:25; Eph 5:32. ἐπί τινα Hb 7:13. πρός τινα Lk 12:41; Hb 1:7.
    β. by the acc. alone mean someone or someth. (Demosth. 18, 88; Diod S 15, 23, 5; Phalaris, Ep. 142, 1 ἣν λέγω; Ael. Aristid. 48, 35 K.=24 p. 474 D.: τὸν Φιλάδελφον λέγων; Aelian, NA 8, 3 ὸ̔ δὲ λέγω, τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, VH 3, 36; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; 10, 2; 2 Macc 14:7; Jos., Ant. 6, 86; TestSol 4:6 D τὸν δύστηνον λέγω γέροντα; Just., D. 130, 2 μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ, λέγω Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ …) τ. ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὸ̔ν λέγετε this man whom you mean Mk 14:71. ἔλεγεν τὸν Ἰούδαν J 6:71. συνείδησιν λέγω οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ I mean not your own conscience 1 Cor 10:29. τοῦτο δὲ λέγω but this is what I mean Gal 3:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:12a (Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 3, 12; 2, 11, 1 λέγω δέ … but I mean).—Mt 26:70; Mk 14:68; Lk 22:60. Cp. 4 end.
    γ. w. an indication of the one to whom someth. is said (on the synoptics and Ac s. WLarfeld, Die ntl. Ev. 1925, 237f); mostly in dat. (Aeschyl., Ag. 103; Herodas 4, 42 σοί; POxy 413, 99; s. also 1aα above) Mt 8:7; Mk 2:8, 17f; Lk 3:7; 5:24; J 1:39, 41, 43 and oft.—πρός τινα (Epict. 2, 17, 34 πρὸς ἄλλους ἐρεῖς; TestSol 1:6 D λέγει Νάθαν πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον; ApcEsdr 6:16; s. also 1aα above) Mk 4:41; 16:3; Lk 4:21; 8:25 (λ. πρὸς ἀλλήλους as Jos., Ant. 2, 108; 9, 239); 9:23; 12:1; 16:1; J 2:3; 3:4; Ac 2:12; 28:4. μετά τινος: ἔλεγον μετʼ ἀλλήλων they said to each other J 11:56.
    δ. in other (s. 1aα, 1bα, 1bγ) prep. uses ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (=ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ v.l.) σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις; do you say this of your own accord? J 18:34 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38] al.). εἴς τινα against someone Lk 22:65. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about or concerning someone J 1:22; Ac 8:34; Tit 2:8. λ. περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι say, with reference to the temple, that Lk 21:5. τί σὺ λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι; what have you to say about him, since? J 9:17b (λ. τι περί τινος, ὅτι as Jos., Bell. 7, 215). τινὶ περί τινος say to someone about someone w. direct discourse foll. Mt 11:7. Also πρός τινα περί τινος (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 279 πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ Μωϋσέως) Lk 7:24. πρός τινα ἐπί τινος bring charges against someone before someone Ac 23:30 (λ. ἐπί τινος as Jos., Vi. 258). λ. περί (v.l. ὑπέρ) τινος say (someth.), speak in someone’s defense 26:1.
    ε. in connection w. adverbs and adv. exprs.: Λυκαονιστὶ λ. say in (the) Lycaonian (language) Ac 14:11. καλῶς correctly (X., Mem. 2, 7, 11; 3, 3, 4; TestJob 7:8; EpArist 125; 196) J 8:48; 13:13. ὡσαύτως in the same way Mk 14:31. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν truly, I tell you Lk 12:44; 21:3. κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (s. ἄνθρωπος 2b) Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15. κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν (s. ἐπιταγή) 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. καθʼ ὑστέρησιν Phil 4:11.
    ζ. w. emphasis on a certain kind of saying: φωνῇ μεγάλῃ in a loud voice Rv 5:12; 8:13 (cp. TestSol 16:1). Also ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 14:7; 9. ἄγγελος ἐν φωνῇ λέγων GJs 20:4 (pap, s. deStrycker p. 387f). Opp. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ (cp. Ps 13:1) 18:7. Also ἐν ἑαυτῷ (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 11 [Stone p. 62]; TestJob 23:8) Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 3:8; 7:39, 49; GJs 1:1,4; 3:1; 5:1; cp. 1:3 (codd.); 2:1 v.l.; 14:1 v.l.
    η. in quotations fr. scripture (but s. also Epict. 1, 28, 4 ὡς λέγει Πλάτων with a quotation) Ἠσαί̈ας λέγει Isaiah says Ro 10:16, 20; 15:12. Μωϋσῆς λέγει 10:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει 11:9. ἡ γραφὴ λέγει (Just., D. 56, 17; cp. Paus. 2, 16, 4 τὰ ἔπη λέγει=the epic poets say) 4:3; 10:11; Gal 4:30; 1 Ti 5:18; Js 4:5; cp. 2:23; J 19:24; 2 Cl 14:2. In the case of the quot. formula λέγει without the subj. expressed, ἡ γραφή or ὁ θεός is easily understood (B-D-F §130, 3; Rob. 392.—On the omission of the subj. [Just., D. 101, 1 al.] cp. Epict. 1, 24, 12 λέγει σοι ‘θὲς κτλ.’=someone says to you ‘lay aside [this and that sign of prestige]’). It could prob. be translated indefinitely it says: Ro 15:10; 2 Cor 6:2; Gal 3:16; Eph 4:8; 5:14. ὁ θεός is obviously the subj. (Clearch., Fgm. 69c; Epict. 1, 1, 10 λέγει ὁ Ζεύς, followed by a divine revelation to Epictetus) Hb 5:6. λέγει ὁ κύριος 2 Cl 13:2; cp. Hb 8:8–10 (λέγει κύριος Am 5:27; Is 1:18; Jer 9:24; ParJer 6:16 al.). W. the passage more definitely indicated (schol. on Pind., O. 7, 66 ἐν τοῖς Μουσαίου λέγεται; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1179 Wendel v.l. ἐν τῇ γ´ τῆς Μουσαίου Τιτανογραφίας λέγεται ὡς) ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή Ro 11:2 (Epict. 2, 17, 34 τί λέγει Χρύσιππος ἐν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ ψευδομένου). Δαυὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν Lk 20:42 (Epict. 2, 19, 14 Ἑλλάνικος λέγει ἐν τοῖς Αἰγυπτιακοῖς with quot.). ἐν τ. Ὡσηὲ λέγει Ro 9:25. λέγει ἐν τῷ Ἠσαί̈ᾳ 2 Cl 3:5 (Just., D. 123, 8); cp. ἐν Δαυίδ Hb 4:7. ὁ νόμος λέγει (cp. Pla., Crito 12, 50c; Epict. 3, 24, 43 τί γὰρ λέγει; [i.e. ὁ νόμος θεῖος]) 1 Cor 14:34. λέγει τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Hb 3:7 (Just., D. 124, 1). Of words of Jesus: λέγει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 2 Cl 8:5. λέγει ὁ κύριος 5:2; 6:1. λέγει αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός 2:7) 3:2. λέγει 4:2.
    θ. Hebraistic, though by no means limited to the OT (s. EKieckers, IndogF 35, 1915, 34ff; B-D-F §420; Mlt-H. 454), is the freq. use of λ. to introduce
    א. direct discourse (like לֵאמֹר), even though it is preceded by a verb of saying, or one that includes the idea of saying. Esp. λέγων is so used, as in the LXX, e.g. after ἀναβοᾶν, ἀνακράζειν Mk 1:23 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 9 Jac. ἀνεκεκράγει λέγων), ἀπαγγέλλειν, ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ἀρνεῖσθαι, βοᾶν, γογγύζειν, διαγογγύζειν, διαλογίζεσθαι, διαμαρτύρεσθαι, διαστέλλεσθαι, διδάσκειν, δοξάζειν, εἰπεῖν Mt 22:1; Lk 12:16; 20:2 (s. B-D-F §101, p. 46; s. Rob. 882f; Kieckers, loc. cit. 36f), ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, ἐντέλλεσθαι, ἐπερωτᾶν, ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἐπιφωνεῖν, ἐρωτᾶν, κατηγορεῖν, κηρύσσειν, κράζειν, κραυγάζειν, λαλεῖν, μαρτυρεῖν, μεριμνᾶν, παραινεῖν, παρακαλεῖν, παρατιθέναι παραβολήν, προσεύχεσθαι, προσφωνεῖν, προφητεύειν, συζητεῖν, συλλαλεῖν, φωνεῖν, ψευδομαρτυρεῖν; s. these entries. Also after such verbs as denote an action accompanied by a statement of some kind: ἄγγελος κυρίου … ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων appeared to him and said Mt 1:20; cp. 2:13; προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λ. fell before him and said 8:2; 9:18; cp. 14:33. ἅπτεσθαι 8:3; 9:29. ἔρχεσθαι Mk 5:35; Lk 18:3; 19:18 al.; cp. Lk 1:66; 5:8; 8:38; 15:9; Ac 8:10, 19; 12:7; 27:23f; 1 Cor 11:25 al.
    ב. the content of a written document (2 Km 11:15; 4 Km 10:6.—1 Macc 8:31; 11:57; Jos., Ant. 11, 26) ἔγραψεν λέγων (=יִכְתֹּב לֵאמֹר) he wrote as follows Lk 1:63.
    ג. orders or instructions to be carried out by other persons: ἔπεμψεν λέγων he sent and had them say Lk 7:19. ἀπέστειλεν λ. (Judg 11:14f; Jdth 3:1; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:21 al.) Mt 22:16; 27:19; Lk 7:20; 19:14; J 11:3. If the persons carrying out the orders are named, the ptc. can refer to them Mt 22:16 v.l.
    ד. When it is used w. the ptc. λ. appears in its finite forms ἐμπαίζοντες ἔλεγον they mocked and said Mt 27:41. προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει he approached him and said Mk 14:45. διαρρήξας … λέγει he tore his clothes as he said vs. 63; cp. vs. 67; 15:35; Lk 6:20; J 1:36; Hb 8:8a al.—Also pleonastically (TestSol 2:2; TestJob 23:4; cp. Homeric ἀμειβόμενος προσέειπε Il. 3, 437 al., προσηύδα 14, 270 al.) ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει he answered Mk 8:29b; 9:5, 19; 10:24; 11:22; Lk 3:11; 11:45; 13:8. κράξας λέγει he cried out Mk 5:7; 9:24 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 109, 29 [Stone p. 66] κράζων καὶ λέγων; ApcEsdr 1:2 κράξας λέγων).
    ι. Now and then short exprs. with λ. are inserted as parentheses (B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434): πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν many, I tell you, will seek Lk 13:24. ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω 2 Cor 11:21b. ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 6:13.
    κ. ptc. w. the article τὰ λεγόμενα what was said (EpArist 215, 298; TestSol 15:13; ApcEsdr 2:15; Jos., Ant. 3, 85; 207; Just., D. 46, 4; 115, 1) Lk 18:34. προσεῖχον τ. λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τ. Φιλίππου (προσέχω 2b) Ac 8:6 (προσέχ. τοῖς λεγ. as Jos., Ant. 13, 303; τὰ λ. ὑπό τινος as Bell. 7, 56; 423; Esth 3:3, also Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 24, p. 408, 19 ὑπὸ τῶν μάντεων; Fgm. 30 p. 417, 23 Jac.; Epict. 1, 18, 1; SIG 679, 87). τὰ ἢ λεχθέντα ἢ πραχθέντα (Ps.-Libanius, Charact. Ep. p. 48, 18; 64, 18; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 55) Papias (2:15) in Eus., HE 3, 39, 15 (=Geb., Harn., Zahn 15, p. 72, 17).
    to express oneself in a specific way, say
    ask w. direct question foll: Mt 9:14; 15:1; 18:1; Mk 5:30f. ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει the Master asks 14:14. W. dat. of pers. and a direct question foll.: Mt 9:28a; 15:34; 16:15; 20:6.
    answer (Lucian, Syr. Dea 18; TestSol 5:8 al.; ApcMos 5) Mt 17:25; Mk 8:24; J 1:21; 18:17b. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse: Mt 4:10; 8:26; 9:28b; 14:17; 15:33; 18:22; 19:7, 20 al. W. dat of pers. and direct discourse introduced by ὅτι Mt 19:8.
    order, command, direct, enjoin, recommend more or less emphatically (Syntipas p. 9, 4; Num 32:27; TestSol 4:7 D; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 21 [Stone p. 44]) τὶ someth. 2 Cl 6:4. ἃ λέγω Lk 6:46. τί τινι command someone (to do) someth. ὅ τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν J 2:5b (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 8 [Stone p. 10]); cp. Ac 21:23 (s. Num 32:31). ὅ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε the order I give to you I give to everyone: be on your guard! Mk 13:37 (for the formal nuance cp. reff. at end of this parag.). Gener. w. dat. of pers. and direct discourse foll.: Mt 5:44; 6:25; 8:4, 9; 26:52; Mk 3:3, 5; 5:8; 6:10; Lk 6:27; 7:8; J 2:7f. W. dat. of pers. and inf. foll.: Rv 10:9; 13:14; w. an inf. and a negative forbid (X., An. 7, 1, 40) Mt 5:34, 39.—Here belongs χαίρειν τινὶ λέγειν (Epict. 3, 22, 64) extend a greeting to someone, since the greeting consists in saying χαῖρε=‘may you prosper’ 2J 10f. W. ἵνα foll. recommend that, tell to τῷ λαῷ λέγων … ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ I do not recommend that anyone should pray about that (sin) 1J 5:16. W. inf. foll.: Ro 2:22.—τάδε λέγει is the formal style of one who is giving an order (introductory formula for the edicts of the Persian kings [IMagnMai 115, 4]; in the OT a favorite method of introducing a prophetic statement [Thackeray p. 11]) Ac 21:11, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (s. Gerhard, Philol. 64, 1905, 27ff; Thieme 23; GRudberg, Eranos 11, 1911, 177f; LLafoscade, De epistulis imperatorum 1902, 63 and 77. Roman edicts gener. use the simple λέγει as in the praescriptio of SEG IX, 8 I, 1–3 αὐτοκράτωρ Καίσαρ Σεβαστὸς … λέγει; also by Augustus: Jos., Ant., 16, 162; s. MBenner, The Emperor Says ’75).
    assure, assert; w. direct discourse foll. Esp. in the formulas λέγω σοι, λ. ὑμῖν, ἀμὴν (ἀμὴν) λ. ὑμῖν (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 19f [Stone p. 18]) Mt 11:22; 12:31; 19:24; 23:39; Mk 11:24; Lk 4:25; 7:9, 28; 9:27.—Mt 5:26; 6:2, 5; 8:10; Mk 3:28; 9:41; 10:15; Lk 4:24; 18:17, 29; 23:43; J 1:51; 3:3, 5, 11; 5:19, 24f; 6:26, 32 al.
    maintain, declare, proclaim as teaching, w. direct discourse foll.: Gal 4:1; 1J 2:4. Foll. by acc. and inf. (X., Symp. 5, 5) Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:41; 23:2b; Ro 15:8; 2 Ti 2:18. Foll. by ὅτι and direct discourse Mk 12:35b; 1 Cor 15:12. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse after ὅτι Mt 5:20, 22, 28, 32; 8:11 al. Someth. like interpret εἰς w. ref. to Eph 5:32.—σὺ λέγεις (that is what) you maintain Mt 27:11; Mk 15:2; Lk 23:3 (cp. σὺ εἶπας Mt 26:25 and s. εἶπον 1a). Cp. also Lk 22:70; J 18:37 (s. OMerlier, RevÉtGr 46, ’33, 204–19; Goodsp., Probs. 64–68 [strong affirmative, yes]; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 506–10 [intentionally ambiguous, so you say, Tannaitic Parallels to the Gospels, ’51, 27–30]; DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’70/71, 213–26). τί λέγει ἡ γνῶσις; what does Gnosis teach about this? With the answer in direct discourse B 6:9 (cp. Epict. 3, 13, 11 καὶ τί λέγει [i.e., ὁ λόγος ὁ τῶν φιλοσόφων=philosophy]; direct discourse follows).
    of written communications (Hdt. 3, 40; 122; 8, 140; UPZ 68, 5 [152 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 80) 1 Cor 6:5; 7:6; 15:51; 2 Cor 6:13; 8:8; Gal 5:2; Phil 4:11; Col 2:4; Phlm 21, al. in Paul.
    to inform about / tell of someth., speak, report (Diog. L. 1, 31) τινί to someone Mk 7:36. τὶ about someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 16 νῦν λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις) τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ of his death (lit., departure) Lk 9:31. τὰ περὶ τ. βασιλείας Ac 1:3. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν αἰσχρόν ἐστιν καὶ λέγειν it is a disgrace even to speak of the things they do Eph 5:12 (Demosth. 10, 27 ὸ̔ … οὔτε λέγειν ἄξιον). τινὶ περί τινος bring a report about someone to someone Mk 1:30; 8:30. Likew. τινί τινα Phil 3:18.
    to identify in a specific manner, call, name (Aeschyl. et al.) w. double acc. (Epict. 2, 19, 19 τί Στωικὸν ἔλεγες σεαυτόν; Diog. L. 8, 88 τὴν ἡδονὴν λέγειν τὸ ἀγαθόν=call pleasure the [real] good; 2 Macc 4:2; Just., D. 61, 1 ἀρχηστρατηγὸν ἑαυτὸν λέγει) τινά τι describe someone as someth. τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν; why do you call me good? Mk 10:18; Lk 18:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον David calls him Lord Mk 12:37. πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν τὸν θεόν he called God his Father J 5:18. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς δούλους I no longer call you slaves 15:15; cp. Ac 10:28; Rv 2:20. Pass. be called, named Mt 13:55; Hb 11:24. ὁ λεγόμενος the so-called (Epict. 4, 1, 51 οἱ βασιλεῖς λεγόμενοι; Socrat., Ep. 14, 7 ὁ λ. θάνατος) λεγόμενοι θεοί so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5 (Herm. Wr. 2, 14 the λεγόμενοι θεοί in contrast to μόνος ὁ θεός. Somewhat differently Jos., Ant. 12, 125 Ἀντίοχος ὁ παρὰ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν θεὸς λεγόμενος). οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀκροβυστία ὑπὸ τῆς λ. περιτομῆς those who are called ‘the uncircumcised’ (i.e. gentiles) by the so-called circumcision (i.e. Jews) Eph 2:11. ὁ λεγόμενος (B-D-F §412, 2; Rob. 1107; cp. BGU 1117, 9 [13 B.C.]; PRyl 133, 11; 137, 19; 2 Macc 12:17; 14:6; 3 Macc 1:3; TestAbr B 13 p. 118, 14 [Stone p. 84]; TestJob 46:5; 47:1; Just., A I, 22, 1, D. 32, 1) who is called … Mt 1:16; 27:17; whose surname is (Appian, Liby. 49 §213 Ἄννων ὁ μέγας λεγόμενος; Jos., Ant. 13, 370, Vi. 4) 10:2; Col 4:11; by name Mt 9:9; 26:3, 14; 27:16; Mk 15:7; Lk 22:47; J 9:11.—Of things: of the name of a star Rv 8:11. Of place-names (BGU 326, 19 [II A.D.]; 2 Macc 9:2; 12:21) Mt 2:23; 26:36; J 4:5; 11:54; 19:13; Ac 3:2; 6:9; Hb 9:3. Of the local, vernacular name λ. Ἑβραϊστί J 5:2 v.l.; 19:17b.—In the transl. of foreign words (which) means: ὅ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος which means ‘Place of a Skull’ Mt 27:33b. Cp. also J 4:25; 11:16; 20:24; 21:2. Also ὸ̔ λέγεται 20:16. ὸ̔ λ. μεθερμηνευόμενον which, when translated, means 1:38. ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται Ac 9:36.—Other exx. of the significance mean (Aeschyl. et al.) are Gal 4:1; 2 Cl 6:4; 8:6 Cp. 1bβ.—B. 1253f; 1257; 1277. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. S. λόγος, ῥῆμα, λαλέω.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λέγω

  • 16 ἐπιθυμία

    ἐπιθυμία, ας, ἡ (s. ἐπιθυμέω; Pre-Socr., Hdt.+)
    a great desire for someth., desire, longing, craving
    as a neutral term, in Hdt., Pla., Thu. et al. αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐ. desires for other things Mk 4:19. ἐ. πράξεων πολλῶν desire for much business Hm 6, 2, 5 (but mng. 2 below is also poss.). ἐ. τῆς ψυχῆς desire of the soul Rv 18:14.
    of desire for good things (Diod S 11, 36, 5 ἐπιθ. τῆς ἐλευθερίας=for freedom; Pr 10:24 ἐ. δικαίου δεκτή; ἄνερ ἐπιθυμιῶν GrBar 1:3; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 111) ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχειν εἴς τι have a longing for someth. Phil 1:23 (ἐ. ἔχειν as Jos., C. Ap. 1, 255; ἐ. εἰς as Thu. 4, 81, 2). ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπιθυμεῖν (Gen 31:30) eagerly desire Lk 22:15 (s. on ἐπιθυμέω); ἐν πολλῇ ἐ. w. great longing 1 Th 2:17. ἐλπίζει μου ἡ ψυχὴ τῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ μου μὴ παραλελοιπέναι τι I hope that, in accordance with my desire, nothing has been omitted B 17:1. ἡ ἐ. καὶ ἡ ἀγρυπνία 21:7. ε. ἀγαθὴν καὶ σεμνήν Hm 12, 1, 1.
    a desire for someth. forbidden or simply inordinate, craving, lust (as early as Plato, Phd. 83b ἡ τοῦ ὡς ἀληθῶς φιλοσόφου ψυχὴ οὕτως ἀπέχεται τ. ἡδονῶν τε καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν κτλ.; Polystrat. p. 30; Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 15 Jac.; then above all, the Stoics [EZeller, Philos. d. Griechen III/14, 1909, 235ff], e.g. Epict. 2, 16, 45; 2, 18, 8f; 3, 9, 21 al.; Maximus Tyr. 24, 4a μέγιστον ἀνθρώπῳ κακὸν ἐπιθυμία; Herm. Wr. 1, 23; 12, 4, also in Stob. p. 444, 10 Sc.; Wsd 4:12; Sir 23:5; 4 Macc 1:22; 3:2 al.; ApcMos 19 ἐ. … κεφαλὴ πάσης ἁμαρτίας; Philo, Spec. Leg. 4, 93, Leg. All. 2, 8, Vi. Cont. 74; Jos., Bell. 7, 261, Ant. 4, 143) Ro 7:7f; Js 1:14f; 2 Pt 1:4. ἐ. πονηρά (X., Mem. 1, 2, 64; Ar. 8, 4) Hv 1, 2, 4; 3, 7, 3; 3, 8, 4; m 8:5. ἐ. κακή (Pla., Leg. 9, 854a; Pr 12:12; 21:26; Just., A I, 10, 6) Col 3:5.—Of sexual desire (as early as Alcaeus [acc. to Plut., Mor. 525ab]; lead tablet fr. Hadrumetum 7 in Dssm., B 28 [BS 273ff] and IDefixWünsch no. 5 p. 23; PGM 17a, 9; 21; Sus Theod. 8; 11; 14 al., LXX 32; Jos., Ant. 4, 130; 132; Ath. 33, 1 μέτρον ἐπιθυμίας ἡ παιδοποιία; Did., Gen. 151, 27 ἄλογος ἐ.) D 3:3. πάθος ἐπιθυμίας 1 Th 4:5. κατʼ ἐπιθυμίαν (cp. Epict. 3, 15, 7; M. Ant. 2, 10, 1; 2; 3; Just., A II, 5, 4; Ath. 21, 1) in accordance with physical desire alone IPol 5:2. πρὸς ἐπιθυμίαν τ. ἀνθρώπων Ox 840, 38 (Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 21, 401e πρὸς τὰς ἐπιθυμίας τοῦ σώματος=to satisfy the desires of the body; cp. 405e: gambling, drunkenness and gluttony are called ἐπιθυμίαι.—In Ox 840, 38, since the ν in ἐπιθυμίαν is missing and restored, the word might also be ἐπιθυμίας.). ἐ. γυναικός (Da 11:37) Hm 6, 2, 5; 12, 2, 1. Pl. (oft. LXX; EpArist 256; Philo) w. παθήματα Gal 5:24. In a list of vices (cp. Philo, Congr. Erud. Grat. 172, Migr. Abr. 60, Vi. Cont. 2) 1 Pt 4:3; D 5:1. ἐ. πολλαὶ ἀνόητοι many foolish desires 1 Ti 6:9; νεωτερικαὶ ἐ. youthful desires 2 Ti 2:22 (WMetzger, TZ 33, ’77, 129–36); κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐ. in accordance w. their own desires 4:3; cp. πρὸς τὰς ἰ. ἐ. Pol. 7:1; κατὰ τὰς ἐ. αὐτῶν AcPl Ha 8, 20 (for this: ἀνομίας AcPl BMM recto, 26, restored after Ox 1602, 27). αἱ πρότερον ἐν τῇ ἀγνοίᾳ ἐ. the desires that ruled over you formerly, when you were ignorant 1 Pt 1:14.—W. gen.: subjective gen. ἐ. ἀνθρώπων 1 Pt 4:2; τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν J 8:44; gen. of quality ἐ. μιασμοῦ defiling passion 2 Pt 2:10; cp. μιαρὰς ἐ. 1 Cl 28:1; βδελυκτὰς ἐ. 30:1. ἐ. τῆς ἀπάτης deceptive desires Eph 4:22. τῶν ἐ. τῶν ματαίων 2 Cl 19:2; cp. Hm 11, 8. ἐ. τῶν ἀσεβειῶν Jd 18. ἐ. τῆς πονηρίας evil desire Hv 1, 1, 8. ἐ. τῆς ἀσελγείας 3, 7, 2; the gen. can also indicate the origin and seat of the desire ἐ. τῶν καρδιῶν of the hearts (Sir 5:2) Ro 1:24. τῆς καρδίας … τῆς πονηρᾶς 1 Cl 3:4. ἐ. τοῦ θνητοῦ σώματος Ro 6:12 (Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 21, 401e, s. above; Sextus 448 ἐπιθυμίαι τοῦ σώματος). τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3; 1J 2:16; 2 Pt 2:18; B 10, 9. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν 1J 2:16; to denote someth. to which desire belongs gener. vs. 17; σαρκικαὶ ἐ. (Hippol., Ref. 5, 9, 22; Did., Gen. 62, 3) 1 Pt 2:11; D 1:4; σωματικαὶ ἐ. (4 Macc 1:32) ibid.; κοσμικαὶ ἐ. worldly desires Tit 2:12; 2 Cl 17:3; ἐ. τῶν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ Pol 5:3; εἰς ἐ. to arouse desires Ro 13:14; ποιεῖν τὰς ἐ. act in accordance w. the desires J 8:44. τελεῖν ἐ. σαρκός gratify the cravings of the flesh Gal 5:16; ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐ. obey the desires Ro 6:12; δουλεύειν ἐ. be a slave to the desires Tit 3:3; cp. δοῦλος ἐπιθυμίας IPol 4:3. ἄγεσθαι ἐπιθυμίαις be led about by desires 2 Ti 3:6. πορεύεσθαι κατὰ τὰς ἐ. Jd 16; 18; 2 Pt 3:3; ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις (Sir 5:2) 1 Pt 4:3; ταῖς ἐ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου Hs 6, 2, 3; 6, 3, 3; 7:2; 8, 11, 3. ἀναστρέφεσθαι ἐν ταῖς ἐ. Eph 2:3.—BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 186f; RAC II 62–78. S. πόθος.—Schmidt, Syn. III 591–601. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπιθυμία

  • 17 ἕτερος

    ἕτερος, α, ον, only [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. with [pref] ἕ-, [dialect] Dor. [full] ἅτερος [pron. full] [ᾰ] IG4.914.9 (Epid.), etc. (and [dialect] Att.in crasis, v.infr.), [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἄτερος Alc.41.5, etc.:— but [full] ἅτερος [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att. crasis for ὁ ἅτερος, Com.Adesp.14.23 D., al., [dialect] Ion. [full] οὕτερος (fr. ὁ ἕτ-) Hdt.1.34, etc., [dialect] Dor. [full] ὥτερος Theoc.7.36; neut.
    A

    θάτερον A.Ag. 344

    , And.2.7, etc., [dialect] Ion.

    τοὔτερον Hdt.1.32

    : pl. ἅτεροι, for οἱ ἅτεροι, Arist.Pol. 1255a20;

    θάτερα S.El. 345

    , Th.1.87, etc.; gen.

    θατέρου S.Ph. 597

    , etc., [dialect] Ion.

    τοὐτέρου Semon.7.113

    , [dialect] Dor.

    θατέρω Ti.Locr.94a

    ,

    θωτέρω Epich.71

    (dub. l.); dat.

    θατέρῳ A.Pr. 778

    ; fem. nom.

    ἡτέρα IG22.1498.76

    , 1615.14,87 (iv B.C.), S.OC 497, Ar.Lys.85, 90 codd., Paus.Gr.Fr.82; dat.

    θητέρᾳ S.OT 782

    , Tr. 272, E.Hipp. 894, Ar.Av. 1365, etc., cf. Paus.Gr. l.c. (in Mss. sts. θατέρᾳ), [dialect] Ion.

    τἠτέρῃ Phoen.5.2

    .—Later masc. and fem. θάτερος, θατέρα, even with the Art., Men.846, Chrysipp. ap. Paus.Gr.Fr.82, Lyc.590, Polem. Cyn.4, Luc.D Mort.26.1 (condemned in Pseudol.29), Gp.14.20.2, etc.;

    τῶν θατέρων Iamb. in Nic. p.83

    P.; θάτερον acc. sg. masc., E. Ion [849].
    I one or the other of two, usu. c. Art. exc. in Poets ; freq. of natural pairs, σκαιῇ (sc. χειρὶ)

    ἔγχος ἔχων, ἑτέρηφι δὲ λάζετο πέτρον Il.16.734

    ; τῇ ἑτέρῃ μὲν.. τῇ δ' ἑτέρῃ .. 14.272, cf. X.Cyn.10.11; χειρὶ ἑτέρῃ with one hand, Il.12.452, Od.10.171 (but χεὶρ ἑτέρη commonly of the left hand, v. infr. IV.I);

    ἑτέροιο διὰ κροτάφοιο Il.4.502

    ;

    χωλὸς δ' ἕτερον πόδα 2.217

    , cf. Ar.Ec. 162, Din.1.82;

    ἀμφότεραι αἱ γνάθοι, ἢ ἡ ἑτέρα X.Eq.1.9

    ;

    ἐκκοπεὶς τὸν ἕ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν D.H.5.23

    ;

    εἰς γόνυ θάτερον Philostr.Im.2.20

    ; of pairs in general, Il.5.258, etc.; τὴν ἑ. πύλην one of the two gates, Hdt.3.156;

    ὁ ἕ. τῶν στρατηγῶν Th.4.43

    ;

    τὸ ἕ. τοῖν δυοῖν τειχοῖν Id.7.24

    : freq. of alternatives presented,

    τῶνδε τὰ ἕ. ποιέειν Hdt.4.126

    ; ἑλοῦ γε θάτερ', ἢ.. ἢ .. S.El. 345; τοῖνδ' ἑλοῦ δυοῖν πότμοιν τὸν ἕ. E.Ph. 952 ;

    δυοῖν ἀγαθοῖν τοῦ ἑτέρου τεύξεσθαι Th.4.28

    ; δυοῖν θάτερα, ἢ.. ἢ .. Pl. Tht. 187c;

    ὅταν δυοῖν καλοῖν θάτερον κάλλιον ᾖ, ἢ τῷ ἑτέρῳ τούτοιν ἢ ἀμφοτέροις ὑπερβάλλον κάλλιόν ἐστιν Id.Grg. 475a

    : in pl., one of two parties or sets, Od.11.258; τῶν ἕτεροί γε παῖδα κλαύσονται one set of parents, either mine or thine, Il.20.210;

    δώῃ δ' ἑτέροισί γε νίκην 7.292

    ;

    ἑτέροισι δὲ κῦδος ἔδωκαν 13.303

    : freq. with neg.,

    οὐδ' ἕτεροι 11.71

    .
    2 in double clauses ἕτερος (in Prose always ὁ ἕτερος) is generally repeated; ἑ. μὲν δουρὶ.., τῷ δ' ἑ. 21.164; τὸν ἕ., ἕ. δὲ .. Od. 5.266;

    ἕ. λευκόν, ἑτέρην δὲ μέλαιναν Il.3.103

    , etc.: but sts. omitted in one clause, [

    ἕτερος μὲν] κακῶν, ἕ. δὲ ἐάων 24.528

    , cf. 7.420, IG22.1388.46 (prob.), etc.;

    ἡ μὲν.., ἡ δ' ἑτέρη Il.22.149

    , IG12.76.50; ἕ..., ὁ δὲ .. Od.8.374; answered by

    ἄλλος, ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ Il.9.313

    , cf. Od.7.123; reversely ἄλλῳ ὀρχηστύν, ἑτέρῳ κίθαριν [ἔδωκε] Il.13.731, cf. Pl.R. 439b, Tht. 184e; τότε μὲν ἕτερα.., τότε δὲ ἄλλα .. Pl.Alc.1.116e; ὁ ἕτερος.., ὁ λοιπός .. X.An.4.1.23 ; ἕτερα.., τὰ δὲ .. S.OC 1454 (lyr.); later

    μίαν μὲν.. ἑτέραν δέ A.D. Synt.172.5

    ;

    τὴν μίαν.. τὴν δ' ἑτέρην AP9.680

    .
    3 repeated in the same clause, ἐξ ἑτέρων ἕτερ' ἐστίν one building follows on another, Od.17.266; <ἀ> δ' ἀτέρα τὰν ἀτέραν κύλιξ ὠθήτω let one cup push on the other, Alc.41.5; ἢ θάτερον δεῖ δυστυχεῖν ἢ θάτερον one party or the other, E. Ion [849];

    ἕτεροι ἑτέρων ἠξίωσαν ἄρχειν Th.2.64

    ; ἕτερος ἀφ' ἑτέρου θεραπείας ἀναπιμπλάμενοι ἔθνῃσκον ib.51;

    εἴ τίς τι ἕτερος ἑτέρου προφέρει Id.7.64

    ;

    ξυμμειγνυμένων ἑτέρων ἑτέροις Ar.Av. 701

    ; συμφορὰ ἑτέρα ἑτέρους πιέζει one calamity oppresses one, another others, E.Alc. 893 (lyr.);

    ἑτέρᾳ δ' ἕτερος ἕτερον ὄλβῳ καὶ δυνάμει παρῆλθεν Id.Ba. 905

    , cf.S.OC 231 (anap.);

    ἄλλη δ' εἰς ἑτέρην ὀλυφύρετο A.R.1.250

    .
    4 = δεύτερος, second, ἡ μὲν.., ἡ δ' ἑτέρη.., ἡ δὲ τρίτη .. Od.10.352 sq., cf. Il.16.179, al., X.Cyr.2.3.22; ἡ ἑ. πρότασις the minor premiss, Arist. EN 1143b3: without Art.,

    ἕ. τέρας Hdt.7.57

    ; προσαγορεύεις αὐτὰ ἑτέρῳ ὀνόματι you call them further by a new name, Pl.Phlb. 13a; cf. IV. 1b.
    b with Pronouns of quantity, ordinals, etc., τόσσοι δ' αὖθ' ἕτεροι ποταμοί as many more, Hes.Th. 367; ἕτερον τοσοῦτον as much again, Hdt.2.149; ἑτέρου τοσούτου χρόνου for as long again, Isoc. 4.153; ἕ. τοιαῦτα other things of like kind, Hdt.1.120, 191; ἑτέρων τοιῶνδε (sc. ἀνθρώπων) ἄρχεις ib. 207; τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ.. τῷ ἑτέρῳ in the same way over again, Id.2.127;

    ἄλλα τε τοιαῦθ' ἕτερα μυρία Ar.Fr.333.4

    ; χιλίας ἑτέρας [δραχμάς] D.58.6; δεύτερον, τρίτον ἕ. δικαστήριον, Id.23.71,74; ἕ. ἐγώ, of a friend, Pythag. ap. Iamb.in Nic. p.35 P.; ἕτεροι αὐτοί second selves, Arist.EN 1161b28;

    εὕρηκε τὸν ἕ., τὸν σέ Men.474

    .
    II without Art., another, of many, with a sense of difference, Il.4.306, Od.7.123, Ar.Ach. 422, Lys.66, etc.;

    ἕ.αὖ τις Id.Eq. 949

    ;

    ἕ. αὖ Id. Pax 295

    , etc.;

    ἕτερα ἄττα Pl.Tht. 188b

    ; repeated

    ἑτέραν χἀτέραν τρικυμίαν Men.536.8

    : with neg., οἷα οὐχ ἕτερα [ἐγένετο] such as none like them had happened, Th.1.23;

    ναυμαχία.. οἵα οὐχ ἑτέρα τῶν προτέρων Id.7.70

    ; οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων μᾶλλον ἑτέρας ib. 29 (s.v.l.); οὐχ ἕτερον ἀλλά .. none other than, Plu.2.671b, cf. UPZ 71.9 (ii B.C.).
    b οἱ ἕ. the rest, Hdt.4.169.
    c ὁ ἑ. ' one's neighbour', ἀγαπᾶν τὸν ἕ. Ep.Rom.13.6, cf. Ep.Gal.6.4.
    III of another kind, different,

    ἕ. δέ με θυμὸς ἔρυκεν Od.9.302

    ; τὸ μὲν ἕ., τὸ δὲ ἕ., i.e. they are different, Pl.Men. 97d, cf. R. 346a;

    ἕ. τε καὶ ἀνόμοιον Id.Smp. 186b

    ;

    τὸ δὲ ταὐτὸν ἕ. ἀποφαίνειν καὶ τὸ θάτερον ταὐτόν Id.Sph. 259d

    ;

    ἕ. ἤδη ἦν καὶ οὐχ ὁ αὐτός D.34.12

    ;

    ἑτέραν ἔδωκεν παντὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ὄψιν OGI458.7

    (i B. C.);

    ἕ. εὐαγγέλιον Ep.Gal.1.6

    : coupled with ἄλλος, χἀτέρους ἄλλους πόνους and other different toils, E.Supp. 573 (s.v.l.), cf. Or. 345 (dub.l.);

    Ῥόδον καὶ ἄλλας ἑτέρας πόλεις D.15.27

    ;

    ἕτερον τό τ' ἀλγεῖν καὶ θεωρεῖν ἐστ' ἴσως Philem.75.7

    ;

    ἕτερα φρονῶν καὶ δημηγορῶν Din.1.17

    : c.gen., other than, different from,

    φίλους.. ἑτέρους τῶν νῦν ὄντων Th.1.28

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 333a, D.10.44, etc.; ἕτερον, ἕτερα ἢ .., E.Or. 345, X.Cyr.1.6.2;

    παρὰ ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a

    ;

    ἕτερα πολιτείας εἴδη παρὰ μοναρχίαν Arist.Pol. 1294a25

    , cf. 1286b21.
    2 other than should be, euphem. for

    κακός, παθεῖν μὲν εὖ, παθεῖν δὲ θάτερα S.Ph. 503

    ;

    ἀγάθ' ἢ θάτερα, ἵνα μηδὲν εἴπω φλαῦρον D. 22.12

    : abs., δαίμων ἕ. Pi.P.3.34; λέκτρα, συμφοραί, E.Med. 639 (lyr.), HF 1238;

    ἐὰν τὰ ἕ. ψηφίσωνται οἱ δικασταί D.48.30

    ; πλέον θάτερον ἐποίησαν did more harm (than good), Isoc.19.25, cf. Pl.Phd. 114e, Euthd. 280e, Aristid.2.117 J.
    IV Special Phrases:
    1 elliptical, mostly in dat. fem.,
    a τῇ ἑτέρᾳ (sc. χειρί), [dialect] Ep. ἑτέρῃ or ἑτέρηφι, with one hand (v. sub init.); with the left hand, Od.3.441, Il.22.80, Theoc.24.45: hence prov., οὐ τῇ ἑτέρᾳ ληπτός not to be caught with one hand, Pl.Sph. 226a;

    ἐκ δ' ἑτέρης A.R.1.1115

    , AP 9.650 (Leont.).
    c (sc. ὁδῷ) in another or a different way,

    καὶ τῇδε φῦναι χἀτέρᾳ S.OC 1444

    ; another way,

    τρέπεσθαι Ar.Nu. 812

    ;

    ἑτέρᾳ πῃ Id.Eq.35

    ; τότ' ἄλλοσ'.., θατέρᾳ δὲ .. S.Tr. 272; θατέρᾳ.., θατέρᾳ .. in one way.., in the other.., Henioch.5.16 ;

    ἑτέρηφι Hes.Op. 216

    : acc.

    ἑτέραν ἐκτρέπεσθαι Luc.Tim.5

    .
    2 adverb. with Preps.:
    a ἐπὶ θάτερα to the one or the other side, one or the other way, ἐπὶ μὲν θάτερα.., ἐπὶ θ. δὲ .. Hp.Art.7; τότε μὲν ἐπὶ θάτερα, τότε δ' ἐπὶ θ. Pl.Sph. 259c: also with another Prep., ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα to or on the other side, Th.1.87; ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα from the other side, Id.7.37; ἐκ μὲν τοῦ ἐπὶ θ., ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ἐπὶ θ. Pl.Prt. 314e: c. gen.,

    ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θ. τοῦ ποταμοῦ Th.7.84

    ;

    εἰς τἀπὶ θ. τῆς πόλεως X.HG6.2.7

    ;

    τὸ ἐπὶ θάτερον τῆς ῥινός Hp.Art.35

    .
    b κατὰ θάτερα on the one or other side,

    κατὰ θ. ἀστός D.57.30

    ;

    ψόφου κατὰ θ. προσπεσόντος Plu.Brut.51

    , etc.; but καθ' ἕτερα at other points, Th.7.42.
    V Adv. [full] ἑτέρως in one or the other way, opp. ἀμφοτέρως, Pl.Tht. 181e; ἑ. τε καὶ ἑ., = ἀμφοτέρως, Id.Phdr. 235a; τοῦ σκέλους ἑ. ἔχειν, = ἑτεροσκελὴς εἶναι, Philostr.VA3.39.
    2 differently, rarely in Poetry,

    οὐχ ἑ. τις ἐρεῖ Theoc.Ep.10.3

    ; ἑ. ἔχειν to be different, Ar.Pl. 371: freq. in Prose, ὡς ἑ. in the other way (cf. ὡς)

    , ἢν ἡ ἑτέρη γνάθος ἐκστῇ ὡς ἑ. χρὴ τὴν ἐπίδεσιν ἄγειν Hp.Art.34

    , cf. Pl.Sph. 266a, etc.; ἐάν τε καλῶς, ἐάν θ' ὡς ἑ. D.18.85, cf. 212: c. gen., differently from,

    ἑ. πως τῶν εἰωθότων Pl.Plt. 295d

    ; ἑ. ἤπερ .. Ael.NA12.28.
    3 otherwise than should be, badly, wrongly, once in Hom.,

    ἑ. ἐβόλοντο Od.1.234

    ;

    εἰ καὶ ἑ. τοῦτο ἀπέβη SIG851.10

    (Marc.Aur.);

    εἴ τι ἑ. φρονεῖτε Ep.Phil. 3.15

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἕτερος

  • 18 ἐπιτάσσω

    ἐπιτάσσω, [dialect] Att. [suff] ἐπιτάρ-ττω,
    A put upon one as a duty, enjoin, τι Hdt.5.111, S.OC 839, etc. ; τί τινι, as

    ἐ. ἄεθλόν τινι Hdt.4.43

    , cf. 1.155 ;

    ἐπέταξε πόνους ἄλλοισιν ἄλλους B.Fr.9

    ;

    ἐπιτάξαντος τᾷ πόλει Γαλλίου σῖτον καὶ Ἀνχαρίου ἱμάτια SIG748.25

    (i B.C.) : c. dat. pers. et inf., order one to do,

    ἐ. τοῖσι μὲν πεζὸν στρατὸν..παρέχειν Hdt.4.83

    , cf. 3.159, Ar.V. 69, And.3.11, etc.: rarely c. acc. et inf., enjoin or order that.., X.Lac. 5.8 ; with the case omitted,

    ἐ. ἀποφορὴν ἐπιτελέειν Hdt.2.109

    , cf. 137 : abs., impose commands, Th.1.140, al. ; τινί on one, S.Ant. 664:— [voice] Pass., accept orders, submit to commands,

    εἰ 'πιταξόμεσθα δή E.Supp. 521

    ;

    ἐπιταττόμενος Ar.V. 686

    : c. inf.,

    οἱ ἐπιταττόμενοι γαμεῖν Pl.Lg. 925e

    : c. acc. rei,

    ἄλλο τι ἐπιταχθήσεσθε Th.1.140

    ; of things, to be ordered,

    ὁ στρατὸς ὁ -θεὶς ἑκάστοισι Hdt.6.95

    ; so

    Λακεδαιμονίοις..ναῦς ἐπετάχθησαν ποιεῖσθαι Th.2.7

    s. v.l. ;

    τὰ ἐπιτασσόμενα ἐπετέλεον

    orders given,

    Hdt.1.115

    ;

    τἀπιταχθέντα Pl.Ti. 20b

    , al. ;

    κατὰ νόμον τὸν ἐπιταχθησόμενον Id.Lg. 740c

    ;

    δικαίωσις τοῖς πέλας -ομένη

    dictated,

    Th.1.141

    : Math., τὸ ἐπιταχθέν what was prescribed, Euc.4.1, al. ; πλευρὰς ἔχον ὅσας ἄν τις ἐπιτάξῃ with as many sides as you please, Papp.290.26.
    2 use the imperative mood,

    εὔχεσθαι οἰόμενος ἐπιτάττει εἰπὼν μῆνιν ἄειδε θεά.. τὸ γὰρ κελεῦσαι, φησί,..ἐπίταξίς ἐστιν Arist.Po. 1456b16

    ; opp. κελεύειν, IG12.76.33.
    II place next or beside,

    [Σαγάρτιοι] ἐπετετάχατο ἐς τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.7.85

    ;

    ἐπετέτακτο Ἀριστοκράτει Περικλῆς X.HG1.6.29

    :—[voice] Med., τοὺς ἱππέας ἐπετάξαντο ἐπὶ τῷ δεξιῷ they had the cavalry placed next, Th.6.67.
    b Gramm., place after, in [voice] Pass.,

    αὐτὸς πάσῃ ἀντωνυμίᾳ -τάσσεται A.D.Pron.34.10

    , cf. Synt.138.23.
    3 set in command over,

    τινί Arr.An.1.24.1

    :—[voice] Pass., οἱ ἐπιτεταγμένοι set as guards over the wagons, Th.5.72 ;

    ταῖς βασιλικαῖς ἐπιστολαῖς -ταχθείς Philostr.VS2.24.1

    , cf. Jul.Or.2.63d.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπιτάσσω

  • 19 ἐκ

    ἐκ, before a vowel [full] ἐξ, also
    A

    ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ Inscr.Cypr. 135.5

    H., in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. before ς ξ ζ ρ and less freq. λ ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ν ; Cret. and [dialect] Boeot. [full] ἐς Leg.Gort.2.49, Corinn.Supp.2.67 ; ἐχ freq. in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, IG12.304.20) ; also ἐ Ναυπάκτω ib.9(1).334.8 ([dialect] Locr.) ; (ἐτ is for ἐπὶ in ib 9(2).517.14 (Thess.)):—Prep. governing GEN. only (exc. in Cypr. and Arc., c. dat., Inscr.Cypr.135.5 H. ([place name] Idalium), (in form ἐς) IG5(2).6.49 (Tegea, iv B.C.)):—radical sense, from out of, freq. also simply, from.
    I OF PLACE, the most freq. usage, variously modified:
    1 of Motion, out of, forth from,

    ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης Il.1.269

    , cf.Pl.Prt. 321c, etc. ;

    μάχης ἔκ Il.17.207

    ;

    ἂψ ἐκ δυσμενέων ἀνδρῶν 24.288

    ; ἐξ ὀχέων, ἐξ ἕδρης, 3.29, 19.77 ;

    φεύγειν ἐκ πολέμοιο 7.119

    ;

    ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων ἐλθεῖν X.Cyr.6.2.9

    ;

    ἐκ χειρῶν γέρας εἵλετο Il.9.344

    , cf. S.Ph. 1287 (but ἐκ χειρὸς βάλλειν or παίειν to strike with a spear in the hand, opp. ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, X.An.3.3.15, Cyr.4.3.16 ; ἐκ χειρὸς τὴν μάχην ποιεῖσθαι ib.6.2.16, cf. 6.3.24, etc.) ; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν ib.5.3.3 ;

    ἐξ ἀγορᾶς ὠνεῖσθαι Pl.Com.190

    .
    3 to denote change or succession, freq. with an antithetic repetition of the same word, δέχεται κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil comes from (or after) another, Il.19.290 ;

    ἐκ φόβου φόβον τρέφω S.Tr.28

    ; πόλιν ἐκ πόλεως ἀμείβειν, ἀλλάττειν, Pl. Sph. 224b, Plt. 289e ;

    λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν D.18.313

    ;

    πόρους ἐκ πόρων ὑπισχνούμενοι Alciphr.1.8

    ;

    ἀπαλλάττειν τινὰ ἐκ γόων S.El. 291

    ;

    ἐκ κακῶν πεφευγέναι Id.Ant. 437

    : hence, instead of,

    τυφλὸς ἐκ δεδορκότος Id.OT 454

    ;

    λευκὴν..ἐκ μελαίνης ἀμφιβάλλομαι τρίχα Id.Ant. 1093

    ;

    ἐλεύθερος ἐκ δούλου καὶ πλούσιος ἐκ πτωχοῦ γεγονώς D.18.131

    , cf. X. An.7.7.28, etc.
    5 of Position, outside of, beyond, chiefly in early writers, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, Il.14.130, etc. ; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.19.7 ; ἐκ πατρίδος banished from one's country, 15.272 ; ἐκ μεσου κατῆστο sate down apart from the company, Hdt.3.83 ; ἐξ ἠθέων τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατεῖλαι out of its accustomed quarters, Id.2.142; ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν out of sight, Id.5.24 ; ἐξ ὁδοῦ out of the road, S.OC 113.
    6 with Verbs of Rest, where previous motion is implied, on, in, δαῖέ οἱ ἐκ κόρυθος..πῦρ lighted a fire from (i.e. on) his helmet, Il.5.4 ; ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body in the river ( with water from the river), Od.6.224 : freq. with Verbs signifying hang or fasten, σειρήν..ἐξ οὐρανόθεν κρεμάσαντες having hung a chain from heaven, Il.8.19 ; ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i.e. on) the peg, Od.8.67 ; ἀνάπτεσθαι ἔκ τινος fasten from i.e. upon) a thing, 12.51 ;

    μαχαίρας εἶχον ἐξ ἀργυρέων τελαμώνων Il.18.598

    ; πρισθεὶς ἐξ ἀντύγων gripped to the chariot-rail, S.Aj. 1030, etc.; ἐκ τοῦ βραχίονος ἵππον ἐπέλκουσα leading it [ by a rein] upon her arm, Hdt.5.12 : with Verbs signifying hold, lead, ἐξ ἐκείνων ἔχειν τὰς ἐλπίδας to have their hopes dependent upon them, Th.1.84 ; ἐκ χειρὸς ἄγειν lead by the hand, Bion Fr.7.2 ; ἐκ ποδὸς ἕπεσθαι ib.6.2 ;

    ἐκ τῆς οὐρᾶς λαμβάνεσθαι Luc.Asin.23

    : with the Art. indicating the place of origin, οἱ ἐκ τῶν νήσων κακοῦργοι the robbers of the islands, Th.1.8, cf. 2.5, 13 ; τοὺς ἐκ τῆς ναυμαχίας those in the sea-fight, Pl. Ap. 32b ; τοὺς ἐκ τῶν σκηνῶν those in the tents, D.18.169 ;

    ἁρπασόμενοι τὰ ἐκ τῶν οἰκιῶν X.Cyr.7.2.5

    ;

    οἱ ἐκ τοῦ πεδίου ἔθεον Id.An. 4.6.25

    : even with Verbs of sitting or standing, εἰσεῖδε στᾶσ' ἐξ Οὐλύμποιο from Olympus where she stood, Il.14.154 ; καθῆσθαι ἐκ πάγων to sit on the heights and look from them, S.Ant. 411 ;

    στὰς ἐξ ἐπάλξεων ἄκρων E.Ph. 1009

    ; ἐκ βυθοῦ at the bottom, Theoc.22.40 : phrases, ἐκ δεξιᾶς, ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς, on the right, left, X.Cyr.8.3.10, etc.; οἱ ἐξ ἐναντίας, οἱ ἐκ πλαγίοὐ ib.7.1.20 ; ἐκ θαλάσσης, opp. ἐκ τῆς μεσογείας, D.18.301.
    II OF TIME, elliptic with Pron. relat. and demonstr., ἐξ οὗ [ χρόνου] since, Il.1.6, Od.2.27, etc.; in apod., ἐκ τοῦ from that time, Il.8.296 ;

    ἐκ τούτου X.An.5.8.15

    , etc. (but ἐκ τοῖο thereafter, Il.1.493, and ἐκ τούτων or ἐκ τῶνδε usu. after this, X.Mem.2.9.4, S.OT 235) ;

    ἐξ ἐκείνου Th.2.15

    ; ἐκ πολλοῦ (sc. χρόνου) for a long time, Id.1.68, etc.;

    ἐκ πλέονος χρόνου Id.8.45

    ; ἐκ πλείστου ib.68 ; ἐξ ὀλίγου at short notice, Id.2.11 (but also a short time since, Plu.Caes.28) ;

    ἐκ παλαιοῦ X.Mem.3.5.8

    ;

    ἐκ παλαιτάτου Th.1.18

    .
    2 of particular points of time,

    ἐκ νεότητος..ἐς γῆρας Il.14.86

    ;

    ἐκ γενετῆς 24.535

    ; ἐκ νέου, ἐκ παιδός, from boyhood, Pl.Grg. 510d, R. 374c, etc.;

    ἐκ μικροῦ παιδαρίου D.53.19

    ;

    ἐξ ἀρχῆς A.Eu. 284

    , etc.; καύματος ἔξ after hot weather, Il.5.865; νέφος ἔρχεται οὐρανὸν εἴσω αἰθέρος ἐκ δίης after clear weather, 16.365 ;

    ἐκ δὲ αἰθρίης καὶ νηνεμίης συνδραμεῖν ἐξαπίνης νέφεα Hdt.1.87

    ; so (like ἀπό II) ἐκ τῆς θυσίης γενέσθαι to have just finished sacrifice, ib.50, etc.; ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου after breakfast, X.An.4.6.21 ; ἐξ εἰρήνης πολεμεῖν to go to war after peace, Th. 1.120 ;

    γελάσαι ἐκ τῶν ἔμπροσθεν δακρύων X.Cyr.1.4.28

    ;

    κάλλιστον ἦμαρ εἰσιδεῖν ἐκ χείματος A.Ag. 900

    ;

    τὴν θάλασσαν ἐκ Διονυσίων πλόϊμον εἶναι Thphr.Char.3.3

    ; ἐκ χειμῶνος at the end of winter, Plu. Nic.20.
    3 at, in,

    ἐκ νυκτῶν Od.12.286

    ;

    ἐκ νυκτός X.Cyr.1.4.2

    , etc.;

    ἐξ ἡμέρας S.El. 780

    ;

    ἐκ μέσω ἄματος Theoc.10.5

    ; ἐκ τοῦ λοιποῦ or ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν for the future, X.Smp.4.56, Pl.Lg. 709e.
    III OF ORIGIN,
    3 of Place of Origin or Birth,

    ἐκ Σιδῶνος..εὔχομαι εἶναι Od.15.425

    , cf. Th.1.25, etc.;

    ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί Ev.Jo.8.23

    ; ἡ ἐξ Ἀρείου πάγου βουλή the Areopagus, Arist.Ath.4.4, etc. ;

    οἱ ἐκ τῆς διατριβῆς ταύτης Aeschin.1.54

    ; οἱ ἐκ τοῦ Περιπάτου the Peripatetics, Luc.Pisc.43 ; ὁ ἐξ Ἀκαδημείας the Academic, Ath.1.34b ;

    οἱ ἐκ πίστεως Ep.Gal.3.7

    ;

    οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας Ep.Rom.2.8

    .
    4 of the Author or Occasion of a thing, ὄναρ, τιμὴ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν, Il.1.63,2.197, cf. Od.1.33, A.Pers. 707, etc.; θάνατος ἐκ μνηστήρων death by the hand of the suitors, Od.16.447 ; τὰ ἐξ Ἑλλήνων τείχεα walls built by them, Hdt.2.148 ; κίνημα ἐξ αὑτοῦ spontaneous motion, Plot.6.1.21 ;

    ὕμνος ἐξ Ἐρινύων A.Eu. 331

    (lyr.) ;

    ἡ ἐξ ἐμοῦ δυσβουλία S.Ant.95

    ;

    ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ πόθος Id.Tr. 631

    .
    5 with the agent after [voice] Pass. Verbs, by, Poet. and early Prose, ἐφίληθεν ἐκ Διός they were beloved of (i.e.by) Zeus, Il.2.669 ; κήδε' ἐφῆπται ἐκ Διός ib. 70;

    προδεδόσθαι ἐκ Πρηξάσπεος Hdt.3.62

    ;

    τὰ λεχθέντα ἐξ Ἀλεξάνδρου Id.7.175

    , cf. S.El. 124 (lyr.), Ant.93, Th.3.69, Pl.Ti. 47b;

    ἐξ ἁπάντων ἀμφισβητήσεται Id.Tht. 171b

    ;

    ὁμολογουμένους ἐκ πάντων X.An.2.6.1

    ;

    τὰς ἐκ θεῶν τύχας δοθείσας S.Ph. 1316

    , cf. Pl.Ly. 204c : with neut. Verbs,

    ἐκ..πατρὸς κακὰ πείσομαι Od.2.134

    , cf. A.Pr. 759 ;

    τλῆναί τι ἔκ τινος Il.5.384

    ;

    θνήσκειν ἔκ τινος S.El. 579

    , OT 854, etc.;

    τὰ γενόμενα ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Hdt.1.1

    .
    8 freq. as periphr. for Adv.,

    ἐκ προνοίας IG12.115.11

    ; ἐκ βίας by force, S.Ph. 563 ;

    ἐκ δόλου Id.El. 279

    ;

    ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου ζητεῖν Pl.R. 499a

    : esp. with neut. Adjs., ἐξ ἀγχιμόλοιο, = ἀγχίμολον, Il.24.352 ;

    ἐκ τοῦ ἐμφανέος Hdt.3.150

    ; ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ, ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς, Th.4.106, 6.73 ;

    ἐκ προδήλου S.El. 1429

    ; ἐξ ἴσου, ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου, Id.Tr. 485, Th.2.3 ;

    ἐξ ἀέλπτου Hdt.1.111

    , etc.: with fem. Adj.,

    ἐκ τῆς ἰθέης Id.3.127

    ;

    ἐκ νέης Id.5.116

    ;

    ἐξ ὑστέρης Id.6.85

    ;

    ἐκ τῆς ἀντίης Id.8.6

    ;

    ἐκ καινῆς Th.3.92

    ;

    ἐξ ἑκουσίας S.Tr. 727

    ; ἐκ ταχείας ib. 395.
    9 of Number or Measurement, with numerals, ἐκ τρίτων in the third place, E.Or. 1178, Pl.Grg. 500a, Smp. 213b ; distributively, apiece, Ath.15.671b.
    c of Weight,

    ἐπιπέμματα ἐξ ἡμιχοινικίου Inscr.Prien.362

    (iv B.C.).
    B ἐκ is freq. separated from its CASE, Il.11.109, etc.—It takes an accent in anastrophe, 14.472, Od.17.518.—[dialect] Ep. use it with Advbs. in -θεν, ἐξ οὐρανόθεν, ἐξ ἁλόθεν, ἐξ Αἰσύμηθεν, Il.17.548, 21.335, 8.304 ;

    ἐκ Διόθεν Hes.Op. 765

    ;

    ἐκ πρῴρηθεν Theoc.22.11

    .—It is combined with other Preps. to make the sense more definite, as διέκ, παρέκ, ὑπέκ.
    C IN COMPOS. the sense of removal prevails ; out, away, off.
    2 to express completion, like our utterly, ἐκπέρθω, ἐξαλαπάζω, ἐκβαρβαρόω, ἐκδιδάσκω, ἐκδιψάω, ἐκδωριεύομαι, ἐξοπλίζω, ἐξομματόω, ἔκλευκος, ἔκπικρος.
    D As ADVERB, therefrom, Il.18.480.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐκ

  • 20 ὁράω

    ὁράω, [var] contr. [full] ὁρῶ even in Il.3.234, [dialect] Ep. [full] ὁρόω 5.244, etc.; [dialect] Aeol. [full] ὄρημι (q. v.); [dialect] Ion. [full] ὁρέω Hdt.1.80, etc., [ per.] 2sg.
    A

    ὁρῇς Herod.2.67

    , al., [ per.] 3sg.

    ὁρῇ Hp.Carn.17

    , Vid.Ac.I; inf.

    ὁρῆν Democr.11

    , Hp.Carn.2 (but [ per.] 2sg.

    ὁρᾷς Archil.87

    , [ per.] 3sg.

    ὁρᾷ Semon.7.80

    , cf.

    κατορᾷ Hdt.2.38

    ; [ per.] 1pl.

    ὁρῶμεν Id.5.40

    ; [ per.] 3pl. ὁρῶσι ([etym.] ἐπ-) Id.1.124; inf. ὁρᾶν ib.33, 2.64): the forms ὁρῇς, ὁρῇ, ὁρῆν (exc. when found in [dialect] Dor., as IG42(1).122.2, 15,47 (Epid., iv B. C.); [tense] impf. [ per.] 3sg. ἑώρη ib.28,70) seem to imply ὁρή-ω (cf. ὄρημι), but ὁρᾷ, ὁρῶμεν, ὁρῶσι, etc. imply ὁρᾰ-ω: [dialect] Att. [tense] impf.

    ἑώρων Th.1.51

    , Ar.Pl. 713, Nu. 354, ([etym.] ἐ-) SIG344.110 (Teos, iv B. C.); [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὥρα Hdt.1.11

    , 3.72, [ per.] 1pl. ὡρῶμεν (v.l. ὁρῶμεν) Id.2.131,[ per.] 2pl.

    ὡρᾶτε Id.7.8

    .β', [ per.] 3pl.

    ὥρων Id.4.3

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὅρα Il.16.646

    , cf. ὄρημι: [tense] pf. ἑόρᾱκα, a form required by the metre in many passages, as Ar.Th. 32, 33, Av. 1573, Pl.98, 1045, Eup.181.3, Alex.272.1, Men.Epit. 166, Pk. 270, Bato 5.11, etc., whereas the metre never requires ἑώρακα; whence ἑόρακα, -άκη ought always to be restored in early [dialect] Att. writers, though ἑώρακα was used in later Gr., PPetr.2p.55 (iii B. C.), SIG685.74 (ii B. C.), UPZ119.43 (ii B. C.), cf. Theognost.Can. 150 (ἑώρακε<ν> is prob. in Men.5 D.): ἑωρ- in the [tense] impf. prob. comes from ἠ- ϝορ- (with a long form of the augment, cf. ἠειδ- ([etym.] ᾐδ- ) in [tense] impf. of οἶδα, while ἑορ- in the [tense] pf. comes from ϝε-ϝορ-, v. infr.: [dialect] Ion. [tense] pf.

    ὁρώρηκα Herod.4.77

    , al., also ὥρηκα ib.40 ; [dialect] Dor. [tense] pf. part.

    ὡρακυῖα IG42(1).122.6

    (Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ὥρακα Baillet Inscr. destombeaux des rois 1210: an [tense] aor. 1 ἐσορήσαις only f.l. in Orph.Fr.247.16:—[voice] Med. ὁράομαι, [var] contr. ὁρῶμαι even in Il.13.99 ; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 2sg.

    ὅρηαι Od.14.343

    (v. ὄρημι): [tense] impf. ἑωρώμην, also ὡρώμην ([etym.] προ-) Act.Ap.2.25, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὁρᾶτο Il.1.56

    :—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf.

    ἑώραμαι Isoc.15.110

    , D.54.16 : [tense] aor. ἑωράθην only in late Prose, D.S.20.6 ; inf.

    ὁρᾱθῆναι Arist.MA 699b19

    , Pl.Def. 411b, Luc.Jud.Voc. 6, etc.: [tense] fut.

    ὁραθήσομαι Gal.UP10.12

    : verb. Adj. ὁρᾱτός, ὁρᾱτέον (qq. v.).—Hom. uses [var] contr. forms, as ὁρῶ, ὁρᾷς, ὁρᾷ, ὅρα, ὁρᾶν, ὁρῶν, ὁρῶμαι, ὁρᾶται, ὁρᾶσθαι, ὁρώμενος, as well as lengthd. [dialect] Ep. ὁρόω, ὁράᾳς, ὁράασθαι, ὁρόων, [ per.] 2pl. opt.

    ὁρόῳτε Il.4.347

    , etc. ; besides these forms from ὁρα- ([etym.] ὁρη- ) we have
    II from root ὀπ- (v. ὄψ ) the only [tense] fut. in use, ὄψομαι, always in act. sense, Il.24.704, and [dialect] Att., [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 2sg.

    ὄψεαι 8.471

    , Od.24.511: a rare [tense] aor. 1 ἐπ-όψατο in Pi.Fr.88.6 (for ἐπιώψατο, v. ἐπιόψομαι); subj.

    ὄψησθε Ev.Luc.13.28

    (where the v.l. ὄψεσθε may be right): [tense] pf.

    ὄπωπα Il.6.124

    , Od.21.94, Emp.109, Hdt. 3.37,63, Hp.Art.1, Carn.17; Trag. and Com., as A.Eu.57, S.Ant.6, al., Ar.Lys. 1157, 1225, never in [dialect] Att. Prose: [tense] plpf. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὀπώπει Od.21.123

    ,

    ὀπώπεε Hdt.5.92

    .ζ';

    ὀπώπεσαν Id.7.125

    :—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. 1 ὤφθην S.Ant. 709, E.Hec. 970, Th.4.73, etc. ; opt. ([dialect] Ion.)

    ὀφθείησαν Hdt.8.7

    ; part. ὀφθείς, inf. ὀφθῆναι, Id.1.9,10 (for ἐπι-οφθέντας, v. ἐπιόψομαι): [tense] fut.

    ὀφθήσομαι S.Tr. 452

    , E.HF 1155, And.2.10, Lys.3.34 : [tense] pf.

    ὦμμαι Is.Fr. 165

    ,

    ὦψαι D.18.263

    ,

    ὦπται A.Pr. 998

    , D.24.66; cf. ὀπτέον.
    III from ϝιδ- are formed [tense] aor. [voice] Act. εἶδον, inf. ἰδεῖν : [tense] aor. [voice] Med. εἰδόμην, inf. ἰδέσθαι : [tense] pf. with [tense] pres. sense οἶδα I know, inf. εἰδέναι : verb. Adj. ἰστέος (for these tenses, v. Εἴδω). ( ὁρ- prob. from ϝορ-, as indicated by the [tense] impf. and [tense] pf. forms ; cf. βῶροι (i.e. ϝῶροι), Engl. (a)ware.)
    0-0Senses:
    I abs., see, look, freq. in Hom.; εἴς τι or εἴς τινα to or at a thing or person, Il.24.633, Od.20.373, al., E.Fr. 607 ;

    εἰς τὸν πράττοντα Arist.Po. 1460a14

    :—[voice] Med., Od.5.439, Hes.Op. 534, Fr. 188 ; but ἔς τινα ὁρᾶν to be of so-and-so's party, Philostr.VS1.18 ; εἰς τὴν Ἀττάλου καθαίρεσιν εἶδεν aimed at.., Zos.6.12 ; for

    κατ' αὐτοὺς αἰὲν ὅρα Il.16.646

    ,

    Τροίην κατὰ πᾶσαν ὁρᾶται 24.291

    , cf.

    καθοράω 11

    ; ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον looking over the sea, 1.350 ; ὁρᾶν πρός τι look towards,

    ἀκρωτήριον τὸ πρὸς Μέγαρα ὁρῶν Th.2.93

    , cf. AP7.496 (Simon., cj.) ; πρὸς πλοῦν ὁρᾷ looks to sail (i.e. is ready), E.IA[1624];

    ὁ. ἐπὶ τὴν προδοσίαν D.S.36.3

    ;

    πρὸς σπονδάς Id.33.1

    .
    2 have sight, opp. μὴ ὁρᾶν, to be blind, S.Aj.84 ; ὅσ' ἂν λέγωμεν, πάνθ' ὁρῶντα λέξομεν [though I am blind,] my words shall have eyes, i.e. shall be to the purpose, Id.OC74 ; ἐν σκότῳ.. οὓς μὲν οὐκ ἔδει ὀψοίαθ', i.e. should be blind, Id.OT 1274; ἀμβλύτερον ὁ., opp. ὀξύτερον βλέπειν, Pl.R. 596a ; ἐπὶ σμικρὸν ὁ. to be short-sighted, Id.Tht. 174e;

    ὁ. βραχύ τι Id.R. 488b

    .
    3 see to, look to, i.e. take or give heed, Il.10.239 ; ὁ. εἰς γλῶσσαν.. ἀνδρός look to, pay heed to, Sol.11.7, cf. A.Supp. 104 (lyr.): freq. in imper., like βλέπε, folld. by a dependent clause,

    ὅρα ὅπως.. Ar.Ec. 300

    , cf.Th.5.27; ὅρα εἰ.. see whether.., A.Pr. 997, Pl.Phd. 118, etc.; also

    ὅρα μὴ.. S.Ph. 30

    , 519, etc.; ὅρα τί ποιεῖς ib. 589 ;

    πῶς.. ὑπερδικεῖς, ὅρα A.Eu. 652

    .
    4 ὁρᾷς; ὁρᾶτε; see'st thou? d'ye see? parenthetically, esp. in explanations, Ar.Nu. 355, Th. 490, etc.;

    ὡς ὁρᾷς S.El. 1114

    , Tr. 365 ; also ὁρᾷς; at the beginning of a sentence, Id.El. 628, E.Andr.87 ; ἀλλ'—ὁρᾷς; but, do you see.. ?, Pl.Prt. 336b;

    ὁρᾷς οὖν.. ὅτι Id.Grg. 475e

    ; οὐχ ὁρᾷς; ironically, D.18.232.
    5 c. acc. cogn., like βλέπω 11, look so and so,

    δεινὸν ὁρῶν ὄσσοισι Hes.Sc. 426

    ;

    ὁρᾶν ἀλκάν Pi.O.9.111

    ;

    ἔαρ ὁρόωσα Νύχεια Theoc.13.45

    ; also ἡδέως ὁρᾶν look pleasant, E.IA 1122: c. acc.,

    κακῶς ὁρᾶν τινα Philostr.VA7.42

    .
    II trans., see an object, behold, perceive, observe, c. acc., freq. in Hom., etc.: [tense] pf. ὄπωπα exclusively in this sense, Il.2.799, Od.21.94, etc. ; ὀφθαλμοῖσιν or ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὁρᾶν to see with or before the eyes, Il.24.392, Od.8.459, etc. ; αἰεὶ τέρμ' ὁρόων always keeping it in sight, keeping his eye on it, Il.23.323 ; φίλως χ' ὁρόῳτε καὶ εἰ δέκα πύργοι Ἀχαιῶν.. μαχοίατο, i.e. δέκα πύργους, εἰ μαχοίατο, 4.347 ; ὁ. τινά look to (for aid), D.45.64 : in signfs. 1 and 11 combined, οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὁρῶν τάδε; A.Ag. 1623, cf. D.25.89.
    b ζώει καὶ ὁρᾷ φάος ἠελίοιο, poet. for ζῆν, like βλέπειν, Il.18.61, Od.4.833, etc.; so

    φῶς ὁρᾶν S.OT 375

    , E.Or. 1523, Alc. 691:— in [voice] Med.,

    φέγγος ὁρᾶσθαι Id.Andr. 113

    (eleg.); so ὁρᾶν alone,

    τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος Id.Supp.78

    (lyr.).
    c folld. by a clause, οὐχ ὁράᾳς οἷος.. ; Il.21.108 ; ὁρᾷς ἡμᾶς, ὅσοι ἐσμέν; Pl.R. 327c ; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ἥμαρτες; A.Pr. 261, cf. 325, 951 ; Διὸς.. οὐχ ὁρῶ μῆτιν ὅπᾳ φύγοιμ' ἄν ib. 906 (lyr.); ἴδεσθέ μ' οἷα.. πάσχω ib.92.
    d c. part., καπνὸν.. ὁρῶμεν ἀπὸ χθονὸς ἀΐσσοντα we see it rising, Od.10.99; ὁρῶν ἐμαυτὸν ὧδε προυσελούμενον seeing myself thus insulted, A.Pr. 438, cf. 70, 384, al.; ὁρῶ σε κρύπτοντα.. see you hiding.., E.Hec. 342 ; so ὁρῶ μ' ἔργον ἐξειργασμένην I see that I have done, S.Tr. 706 ; cf. infr. 4b ; rarely in reference to the subject, ὁρῶ μὲν ἐξαμαρτάνων (= ὅτι ἐξαμαρτάνω) E.Med. 350:—so in [voice] Med.,

    ἄνδρα διωκόμενον.. ὁρῶμαι Il.22.169

    , cf. A.Pr. 896 (lyr.): also c. inf.,

    ἑώρων οὐκέτι οἷόν τε εἶναι.. Th.8.60

    .
    e rarely c. gen., οὐδεὶς Σωκράτους οὐδὲν ἀσεβὲς.. οὔτε πράττοντος εἶδεν οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσεν (where the Constr. is suggested by the use of ἤκουσεν) X.Mem.1.1.11 ;

    μέχρι βορῆος ἀπαστράψαντος ἴδηαι Arat. 430

    .
    2 see to,

    ἴδε πῶμα Od.8.443

    ; look out for, provide,

    τινί τι S.Aj. 1165

    (anap.), Theoc.15.2 ;

    πρόβατον εἰς ὁλοκάρπωσιν LXX Ge.22.8

    .
    3 the inf. is used after an Adj.,

    δεινὸς ἰδεῖν Sol.13.6

    ;

    εὐφεγγὴς ἰδεῖν A. Pers. 387

    , cf. 398, Ch. 174, 176, al. (cf.

    Εἴδω A.1.1

    a) ; ἐχθίστου.. ὁρᾶν most hateful to behold, S.Aj. 818 ;

    ὦ πάτερ δύσμοιρ' ὁρᾶν Id.OC 327

    ;

    ὁρᾶν στυγνὸς ἦν X.An.2.6.9

    :—[voice] Med. or [voice] Pass.,

    αἰσχρὸς ὁρᾶσθαι Id.Cyn. 3.3

    : with an Adv.,

    μὴ διχορρόπως ἰδεῖν A.Ag. 349

    : with a Subst.,

    ἄνδρα τευχηστὴν ἰδεῖν Id.Th. 644

    : with a Verb,

    πρέπουσι.. ἰδεῖν Id.Supp. 720

    , cf. S.OT 792.
    4 [voice] Med. is used by Poets like [voice] Act., Il.13.99, A.Pers. 179, Ch. 407 (lyr.), S.Ant. 594 (lyr.), Tr. 306, Cratin.138, etc., v. supr. 11.1 b, c: but in Prose [voice] Med. occurs only in compds., as προ-ορῶμαι: for the imper. ἰδοῦ, ἰδού, v. ἰδοῦ.
    b no [voice] Pass. is used by Hom.; in [dialect] Att. the [voice] Pass. has the sense to be seen, A.Pr. 998,Eu. 411, etc.: c. part., ὤφθημεν ὄντες ἄθλιοι was seen in my wretchedness, E. IT 933 ;

    ὀφθήσεται διώκων

    he will prove to be..,

    Pl.Phdr. 239c

    , cf. Smp. 178e; τὰ ὁρώμενα all that is seen, things visible, like τὰ ὁρατά, Id.Prm. 130a.
    III metaph., of mental sight, discern, perceive, S.El. 945, etc.; so blind Oedipus says, φωνῇ γὰρ ὁρῶ, τὸ φατιζόμενον I see by sound, as the saying is, Id.OC 138 (anap.);

    ἂν οἴνου.. ὀσμὴν ἴδωσιν Alex.222.4

    ; cf. supr. 1.4,

    δέρκομαι 1.2

    .
    IV abs., see visions,

    ὁ ἀληθινῶς ὁρῶν LXX Nu.24.3

    ,15 :—[voice] Pass., appear in a vision, ὤφθη ἄγγελος πρὸς τὴν γυναῖκα ib.Jd.13.3.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁράω

См. также в других словарях:

  • Over — O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Over all — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Over head and ears — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Over one's head — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Over the left — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Over 21 — Directed by Charles Vidor Produced by Sidney Buchman Written by Ruth Gordon (play) Sidney Buchman Starring …   Wikipedia

  • Over the Wine Dark Sea —   Author(s) H. N. Turte …   Wikipedia

  • over-achiever — UK US noun [countable] [singular over achiever plural over achievers] someone who tries extremely hard to be successful and puts pressure on themselves to achieve many things Thesaurus: people who work hard and are busy …   Useful english dictionary

  • head over heels — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • To run over — Over O ver ([=o] v[ e]r), prep. [AS. ofer; akin to D. over, G. [ u]ber, OHG. ubir, ubar, Dan. over, Sw. [ o]fver, Icel. yfir, Goth. ufar, L. super, Gr. ype r, Skr. upari. [root]199. Cf. {Above}, {Eaves}, {Hyper }, {Orlop}, {Super }, {Sovereign},… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • over-achiever — UK / US noun [countable] Word forms over achiever : singular over achiever plural over achievers someone who tries extremely hard to be successful and puts pressure on themselves to achieve many things Derived word: over achieve verb intransitive …   English dictionary

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»